Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

on+any+day

  • 1 ἡμέρα

    ἡμέρα, [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion. [full] ἡμέρη IG12(5).1 ([place name] Ios), [dialect] Dor. [full] ἀμέρα ib.5(1).213.43,al., 1390.109, 1432.25, Test.Epict.4.12, Michel995A 32, etc., [dialect] Locr. [full] ἀμάρα IG9(1).334.42 (aspirated perh. only in [dialect] Att. and West [dialect] Ion., cf.
    A

    ἐπάμερος Pi.

    , etc.,

    αὐθημερόν IG7.235.18

     ([place name] Oropus), etc.; usu. unaspirated in early [dialect] Att. Inscrr., IG12.49.6, al.; aspirated in codd. even in dialects: original ἀμέρα prob. took aspirate from ἑσπέρα): ἡ:— day, less freq. than ἦμαρ in Hom.,

    ἡ. ἥδε κακὸν φέρει Il.8.541

    , 13.828; τίς νύ μοι ἡ. ἥδε; Od.24.514; νύκτες τε καὶ ἡ. 14.93; μῆνές τε καὶ ἡ. ib. 293;

    νοῦσοι ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ αἳ δ' ἐπὶ νυκτί Hes.Op. 102

    ; ἡ σήμερον ἡ., v. σήμερον· ἅμα ἡμέρᾳ or ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ at daybreak, X.An.6.3.6, Aeschin.3.76;

    ἅμ' ἡμέρῃ διαφωσκούσῃ Hdt.3.86

    ; ἡ. διέλαμψεν, ἐξέλαμψεν, ὑπέφαινε, Ar.Pl. 744, Pax 304, X.Cyr.4.5.14; τῆς ἡ. ὀψέ late in the day, Id.HG2.1.23.
    2 sts. like [dialect] Ep. ἦμαρ, with Adjs. to describe a state or time of life, ἐπίπονος ἁ. a life of misery, S.Tr. 654 (lyr.); λυπρὰν ἄγειν ἡ. E. Hec. 364; ἐχθρὰ ἡ. Id.Ph. 540; παλαιὰ ἁ. old age, S.Aj. 623 (but θεία ἡ. Id.Fr. 950 is dub. l.); τερμία ἁ. Id.Ant. 1330 (lyr.); αἱ μακραὶ ἁμέραι length of days, Id.OC 1216(lyr.); νέα ἁ. youth, E. Ion 720(lyr.); so τῇ πρώτῃ ἡ. Arist.Rh. 1389a24; ἐπὶ τῇ τελευταίᾳ ἡ. at the close of life, ib. 1389b33, cf. S.OT 1529; ζοὴν βλέπουσιν ἡ. look life-like, Herod.4.68.
    3 poet. for time,

    ἡ. κλίνει τε κἀνάγει πάλιν ἅπαντα τἀνθρώπεια S.Aj. 131

    ;

    ἐς τόδ' ἡμέρας Id.OC 1138

    : pl., ἐν ἡμέραις τινός in the days of.., LXX 1 Ch.4.41, etc.; ἡ. ἀρχαῖαι ib.Ps.142(143).5.
    4 birthday, D.L.4.41.
    5 a fixed day, τακτὴ ἡ. Act.Ap.12.21; ῥητὴ ἡ. Luc.Alex.19;

    ἡ. ἔστησαν ἀρχαιρεσιῶν D.H.6.48

    , cf. Act.Ap.17.31;

    ἡ. Κυρίου LXXJl.2.1

    , cf. 2 Ep.Pet.3.12, etc.;

    ἡ. κρίσεως Ev.Matt.10.15

    : so abs., ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας a human tribunal, 1 Ep.Cor.4.3;

    ἡμέραι καὶ ἀγῶνες Jahresh.23

    Beibl.93 (Pamphyl.).
    6 in pl., age, προβεβηκὼς ἐν ταῖς ἡ. Ev.Luc.1.7, cf. LXXGe.47.8, etc.
    II abs. usages,
    1 gen., τριῶν ἡμερέων within three days, Hdt.2.115, cf. Th.7.3; ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων within a few days, Id.4.26, etc.; ἄλλης ἡ. another day, S.El. 698; τῆς αὐτῆς ἡ. Isoc.4.87;

    μιᾶς ἀμέρας IG5(1).213.43

     (Sparta, V B.C.); ἡμέρας by day, opp. νυκτός, S.Fr.65;

    οὔθ' ἡμέρας οὔτε νυκτός Pl.Phdr. 240c

    ; τοὺς.. τῆς ἡ. ἄρτους δ ¯ daily, UPZ 47.21 (ii B.C.); δὶς τῆς ἡμέρης ἑκάστης twice every day, Hdt.2.37; δίς τῆς ἡ. Pl.Com.207; πεντάκις τῆς ἡ. Men.326; κατεσθίω.. τῆς ἡ. πένθ' ἡμιμέδιμνα five every day, Pherecr.1.
    3 acc., πᾶσαν ἡ. any day, i.e. soon, Hdt.1.111, 7.203; τὴν μὲν αὐτίχ' ἡ. S.OC 433; ὅλην τὴν ἡ. Eup.233; τρίτην ἡ. ἥκων two days after one's arrival, Th.8.23;

    οὐδεμίαν ἡ. ὑπεύθυνος εἶναί φημι D.18.112

    ; πέντε ἡμέρας during five days, Th.8.103; τὰς ἡ. in the daytime, X.Cyr.1.3.12; τὴν ἡ. daily, LXXEx. 29.38.
    III with Preps., μίαν ἀν' ἁμέραν on one day, Pi.O.9.85; ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡ. every day, Hdt.7.198; ἀφ' ἡμέρας τῆς νῦν from this day, S.OT 351; but ἀφ' ἡμέρας γίνεσθαι ἐν τῷ Μουσείῳ from early in the day, Plb.8.25.11: δι' ἡμέρης, [dialect] Att. - ρας, the whole day long, Hdt.1.97, 2.173, Pherecr.64, Ar.Ra. 260(lyr.); διὰ τρίτης ἡ. every other day, Hdt. 2.37; διὰ πολλῶν ἡ. at a distance of many days, Th.2.29;

    δι' ἡμερῶν τινων Thphr.HP4.3.6

    ; εἰσ ἡμέραν yearly, LXXJd.17.10; ἐν ἡμέρῃ in a single day, Hdt.1.126, cf. Men.Pk. 377;

    ἐνἡ. μιᾷ S.OT 615

    ; τῇδ' ἐν ἡ. Id.OC 1612; ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡ. Ev.Jo.14.20; ἐν ἑστέραισιν ἡ. A.Ag. 1666; ἐν ὀκτὼ ἡ. Lys.20.10; but ἐν τρισὶν ἡ. within three days, Ev.Jo.2.19; ἐξ ἡμέρας by day, οὔτε νυκτὸς οὔτ' ἐξ ἡ. S.El. 780; ἡμέραν ἐξ ἡμέρας day after day, Henioch.5.13, LXXGe.39.10, 2 Ep.Pet.2.8 (but

    ἐξ ἡμερῶν εἰς ἡμέρας LXX 2 Ch.21.15

    ); ἐπ' ἡμέρην ἔχειν, ἐφ' -ραν χρῆσθαι, sufficient for the day, Hdt.1.32, Th.4.69;

    τὸ γὰρ βρότειον σπέρμ' ἐφ' ἡ. φρονεῖ A. Fr. 399

    ;

    τῆς ἐφ' ἡ. βορᾶς E.El. 429

    ; but τοὐφ' ἡμέραν day by day, Id.Cyc. 336: c. dat., ἐπ' ἡμέρῃ ἑκάστῃ (v.l. -ρης -της ) every day, Hdt.5.117;

    ὁ ἥλιος νέος ἐφ' ἡμέρῃ Heraclit.6

    ; καθ' ἡμέραν by day, A.Ch. 818 (lyr.); καθ' ἡ. τὴν νῦν to-day, S.OC3, Aj. 801; but καθ' ἡ. commonly means day by day, IG12.84.40, etc.; καθ' ἡ. ἀεί [S.]Fr.1120.4: with Art.,

    τὸν καθ' ἡ. βίον Id.OC 1364

    ;

    ἡ καθ' ἡ. ἀναγκαία τροφή Th.1.2

    ;

    τὰ καθ' ἡ. ἐπιτηδεύματα Id.2.37

    ;

    τὸ καθ' ἡ. ἀδεές Id.3.37

    , etc.; τὸ καθ' ἡ. every day, Ar.Eq. 1126 (lyr.), etc.; also

    τὰ καθ' ἑκάστην τὴν ἡ. ἐπιτηδεύματα Isoc.4.78

    ; μετ' ἡμέρην in broad daylight, opp. νυκτός, Hdt.2.150, cf. Ar.Pl. 930; opp. νύκτωρ, Aeschin.3.77; μεθ' ἡμέρας some days after, LXXJd.15.1; ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη day following on day, Antipho 5.72; but παρ' ἡμέραν every other day, Dsc.3.137, Luc.DDeor.24.2;

    παρ' ἡ. ἄρχειν Plu.Fab.15

    ;

    καθ' ἡμέραν εἰώθειν ὀργίζεσθαι, νῦν παρ' ἡμέραν, εἶτα παρὰ δύο, εἶτα παρὰ τρεῖς Arr.Epict.2.18.13

    ; πρὸ ἡμέρας before day-break, Diph.22; but πρὸ ἀμερᾶν δέκα ἤ κα μέλλωντι ἀναγινώσκεν GDI5040.42 ([place name] Crete);

    πρὸ ἡμερῶν ἑπτὰ εἰδυῶν Ὀκτωμβρίων SIG646.2

     (Thisbe, ii B.C.); γίγνεται, ἔστι πρὸς ἡμέραν, towards day, near day, X.HG2.4.6, Lys.1.14; also, for the day, daily, Charito 4.2.
    IV as pr. n., the goddess of day, Hes.Th. 124.
    2 v. ἥμερος 11.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἡμέρα

  • 2 παρά

    πᾰρά [pron. full] [ρᾰ], [dialect] Ep. and Lyr. also [full] παραί: shortd. [full] πάρ, in Hom., Lyr. (but rarely in Trag., in lyr. passages, A.Supp. 553, S.Tr. 636), and in all dial ects exc. [dialect] Att., GDI5434.8 ([place name] Paros), IG5(2).3.14 (Tegea, iv B. C.), Inscr.Magn.26.28 (Thess.), etc.:—Prep. c. gen., dat., and acc., prop.
    A beside: hence,
    A WITH GEN. prop. denoting motion from the side of, from beside, from:
    I of Place,

    πὰρ νηῶν ἔλθωμεν Il.13.744

    ;

    παρὰ ναῦφιν ἐλευσόμεθ' 12.225

    , etc.;

    παρ' Ὠκεανοῖο ῥοάων.. ἐπερχομένη Od.22.197

    ;

    πὰρ νηῶν ἀπώσεται Il.8.533

    , etc.;

    δῶρα π. νηὸς ἐνεικέμεν 19.194

    ;

    φάσγανον ὀξὺ ἐρυσσάμενος π. μηροῦ 1.190

    , cf. 21.173;

    σπασσάμενος.. ἄορ παχέος π. μηροῦ 16.473

    ; πλευρὰ παρ' ἀσπίδος ἐξεφαάνθη was exposed beside the shield, 4.468, cf. A.Th. 624.
    II commonly of Persons,
    1 with Verbs of going or coming, bringing, etc.,

    ἦλθε.. πὰρ Διός Il.2.787

    ;

    παρ' Αἰήταο πλέουσα Od.12.70

    , etc.;

    ἀγγελίη ἥκει π. βασιλέος Hdt.8.140

    .

    ά; αὐτομολήσαντες π. βασιλέως X.An.1.7.13

    ;

    ἐξεληλυθὼς παρ' Ἀριστάρχου D.21.117

    ; ὁ π. τινὸς ἥκων his messenger, X.Cyr.4.5.53; so

    οἱ π. τινός Th.7.10

    , Ev.Marc.3.21, etc.;

    ὅστις ἀφικνεῖτο τῶν π. βασιλέως πρὸς αὐτόν X.An.1.1.5

    , etc.; τεύχεα καλὰ φέρουσα παρ' Ἡφαίστοιο from his workshop, Il.18.137, cf. 617, etc.;

    ἀπαγγέλλειν τι π. τινός X.An.2.1.20

    ;

    σὺ δὲ οἰμώζειν αὐτοῖς παρ' ἐμοῦ λέγε Luc.DMort.1.2

    .
    2 issuing from a person, γίγνεσθαι π. τινός to be born from, Pl.Smp. 179b; λόγος (sc. ἐστί) π. Ἀθηναίων c. acc. et inf., Hdt.8.55: freq. following a Noun, δόξα ἡ π. τῶν ἀνθρώπων glory from (given by) men, Pl.Phdr. 232a; ἡ π. τινὸς εὔνοια the favour from, i. e. of, any one, X.Mem.2.2.12; τὸ παρ' ἐμοῦ ἀδίκημα done by me, Id.Cyr.5.5.13; τὰ π. τινός all that issues from any one, as commands, commissions, Id.An.2.3.4, etc.; or promises, gifts, presents, Id.Mem.3.11.13; τὰ παρ' ἐμοῦ my opinions, Pl.Smp. 219a; παρ' ἑωυτοῦ διδούς giving from oneself, i. e. from one's own means, Hdt. 2.129, 8.5;

    παρ' ἑαυτοῦ προσετίθει X.HG6.1.3

    ; νόμον θὲς παρ' ἐμοῦ by my advice, Pl.Prt. 322d; αὐτοὶ παρ' αὑτῶν of themselves, Id.Tht. 150d, cf. Phdr. 235c.
    3 with Verbs of receiving, obtaining, and the like ,

    τυχεῖν τινος π. τινός Od.6.290

    , 15.158;

    πὰρ δ' ἄρα μιν Ταφίων πρίατο 14.452

    ;

    ἀρέομαι πὰρ μὲν Σαλαμῖνος Ἀθαναίων χάριν Pi.P.1.76

    ;

    εὑρέσθαι τι π. τῶν θεῶν Isoc.9.14

    , cf. IG12.40.10; δέχεσθαι, λαμβάνειν, ἁρπάζειν π. τινός, Th.1.20, X.Oec.9.11, Hes.Th. 914; ἀντιάσαι, αἰτήσασθαι π. τινός, S.El. 870 (lyr.), X.HG3.1.4;

    ἀξιοῖ π. τοῦ ἰατροῦ φάρμακον πιὼν ἐξεμέσαι τὸ νόσημα Pl.R. 406d

    ;

    κόσμος τοῖς πράξασι γίγνεται π. τῶν ἀκουσάντων Id.Mx. 236e

    : without Verb,

    ὁ καρπὸς ὁ π. τῶν δημάρχων IG12.76.27

    : with Verbs of learning, etc.,

    μεμαθηκέναι π. τινῶν Hdt.2.104

    , etc.
    4 with [voice] Pass. Verbs,

    πὰρ Διὸς.. μῆνις ἐτύχθη Il.15.122

    ;

    π. θεῶν ἡ τοιαύτη μανία δίδοται Pl.Phdr. 245c

    , etc.; τὰ π. τῶν θεῶν σημαινόμενα, συμβουλευόμενα, X.Cyr.1.6.2; τὰ π. τινὸς λεγόμενα ib.6.1.42; τὰ π. τῆς τύχης δωρηθέντα the presents of.., Isoc.4.26;

    με π. σοῦ σοφίας πληρωθήσεσθαι Pl.Smp. 175e

    .
    III rarely for παρά c. dat., by, near,

    πὰρ ποδός Pi.P.10.62

    , 3.60; παρὰ δὲ κυανέων πελαγέων dub. l. in S.Ant. 966 (lyr.);

    τὸν Ῥειτὸν τὸν παρὰ τοῦ ἄστεως IG12.81.5

    ; πολλοὶ παρ' ἀμφοτέρων ἔπιπτον, = ἀμφοτέρωθεν, D.S.19.42.
    IV π. τῆς συγχωρήσεώς τινος without his consent, BCH46.337 ([place name] Teos).
    B WITH DAT. denoting rest by the side of any person or thing, answering the question where?
    I of Places, κατ' ἂρ ἕζετ'.. πὰρ πυρί, ἔκειτο π. σηκῷ, Od.7.154, 9.319;

    νέμονται π. πέτρῃ 13.408

    ;

    ἑσταότες παρ ὄχεσφιν Il.8.565

    ; πὰρ ποσὶ μαρναμένων ἐκυλίνδετο at their feet, 14.411, etc.; π. θύρῃσι at the door, 7.346;

    π. ῥηγμῖνι θαλάσσης 2.773

    ;

    δεῖπνον.. εἵλοντο παρ' ὄχθῃσιν ποταμοῖο Od.6.97

    , cf. Il.4.475, 20.53, etc.;

    κεῖσθαι παρ' Ἅιδῃ S.OT 972

    ; παρ' οἴνῳ over wine, ib. 780, etc.
    2 at one's house or place, with one,

    μένειν π. τισί 9.427

    ;

    θητευέμεν ἄλλῳ, ἀνδρὶ παρ' ἀκλήρῳ Od.11.490

    ;

    φιλέεσθαι π. τινί Il.13.627

    ; παρ' ἑωυτοῖσι at their own house, Hdt.1.105, cf. 86;

    παιδευθῆναι π. τινί X.Cyr.1.2.15

    ;

    καταλύειν π. τινί D.18.82

     (but

    παρά τινα καταλῦσαι Th.1.136

    ), etc.: hence οἱ παρ' ἐμοί those of my household, X.Mem.2.7.4, etc.; τὰ παρ' ἐμοί life with me, Id.An. 1.7.4; οἱ παρ' ἡμῖν ἄνθρωποι our people, Pl.Phd. 64b; ἡ παρ' ἡμῖν πολιτεία, ὁ παρ' ὑμῖν δῆμος, D.15.19; ὁ παρ' αὑτῷ βίοτος one's own life, S.OT 612;

    τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν πῦρ Pl.Phlb. 29f

    ;

    ὅσος παρ' ὑμῖν ὁ φθόνος φυλάσσεται S.OT 382

    ;

    τὸ παρ' ἡμῖν σῶμα Pl.Phlb. 29f

    ; also, in one's hands,

    τὰ π. τοῖς Ἑλληνοταμίαις ὄντα IG12.91.6

    ;

    ἔχειν παρ' ἑωυτῷ Hdt. 1.130

    , etc.; οὔπω παρ' ἐμοὶ τότ' ἦν λέγειν I had no right to speak then, Men.Epit.98.
    3 before, in the presence of,

    ἤειδε π. μνηστῆρσιν Od. 1.154

    ; before a judge,

    δίκας γίγνεσθαι π. τῷ πολεμάρχῳ IG12.16.9

    ;

    π. Δαρείῳ κριτῇ Hdt.3.160

    ;

    π. τῷ βασιλέϊ Id.4.65

    ;

    παρὰ δικασταῖς Th. 1.73

    ;

    εἰς κρίσιν καθιστάναι τινὰ π. τισί D.18.13

    : hence παρ' ἐμοί in my judgement, Hdt.1.32, cf. S.Tr. 589, E.Heracl. 881, 1 Ep.Cor.3.19; π. τούτῳ μέγα δυνήσεται with him, Pl.Grg. 510e.
    4 in quoting authors, παρ' Ἐφόρῳ, παρ' Αἰσχίνῃ, π. Θουκυδίδῃ, in Ephorus, etc., Plb. 9.2.4, D.H.Comp.9,18.
    III Arc., = π. c. gen., from,

    καθὰ εἶχον τὰς ἰντολὰς π. τᾷ ἰδίᾳ πόλι SIG559.9

     (Megalop., iii B. C.), cf. 558.10 (Ithaca, iii B. C.).
    C WITH ACCUS. in three main senses,
    I beside, near, by,
    II along,
    III past, beyond.
    I beside, near, by:
    1 with Verbs of coming, going, etc., to the side of, to,

    ἴτην π. νῆας Il.1.347

    , cf. 8.220, etc.;

    βῆ.. π. θῖνα 1.34

    , cf. 327, etc.; τρέψας πὰρ ποταμόν to the side of.., 21.603, cf. 3.187: more freq. of persons, εἶμι παρ' Ἥφαιστον to the chamber of H., 18.143, cf. Od.1.285, etc.;

    ἐσιόντες π. τοὺς φίλους Th.2.51

    , etc.;

    φοιτᾶν π. τὸν Σωκράτη Pl.Phd. 59d

    ; πέμπειν ἀγγέλους, πρέσβεις π. τινά, Hdt. 1.141, Th.1.58, etc.;

    ἄγειν π. τινά Hdt.1.86

    ;

    καταφυγὴ π. φίλων τινάς Th.2.17

    .
    2 with Verbs of rest, beside, near, by, sts. with ref. to past motion (expressed in such phrases as

    ἧσο παρ' αὐτὸν ἰοῦσα Il.3.406

    , cf. 11.577),

    ἔς ῥα θρόνους ἕζοντο παρ' Ἀτρεΐδην Μενέλαον Od.4.51

    , cf. 13.372; κεῖται ποταμοῖο παρ' ὄχθας lies stretched beside.., Il.4.487, cf. 12.381; παρ' ἔμ' ἵστασο come and stand by me, 11.314, cf. 592, 20.49, etc.;

    π. πυθμέν' ἐλαίης θῆκαν Od.13.122

    ;

    καταθέτω π. τὰ ἴκρια IG12.94.28

    ; κοιμήσαντο π. πρυμνήσια they lay down by.., Od.12.32, cf. 3.460;

    ὁ παρ' ἐμὲ καθήμενος Pl.Euthd. 271b

    , cf. Phd. 89b; ἐκάθητο π. τὴν πύλην, π. τὴν ὁδόν, LXX Ge.19.1, Ev.Marc. 10.46;

    παρ' αὐτὸν τὸν καλέσαντα κατακείμενος δειπνῆσαι Thphr.Char. 21.2

    , cf. Pl.Smp. 175c;

    ἐκαθέζετο π. τὸν Λύσιν Id.Ly. 211a

    , cf. R. 328c;

    στὰς παρ' αὐτόν Id.Phd. 116c

    ;

    τέμενος νεμόμεσθα.. παρ' ὄχθας Il.12.313

    , cf. 6.34, IG12.943.45;

    τοῦ Εὐρίπου, παρ' ὃν ᾤκει Aeschin.3.90

    ;

    κατελείφθη π. τὸν νηόν Hdt.4.87

    ;

    τὴν παρ' ἐμὲ ἐοῦσαν δύναμιν Id.8.140

    .ά (v.l. ἐμοί)

    ; εἶπεν αὐτῷ μένειν παρ' ἑαυτόν X.Cyr.1.4.18

    , cf. An.1.9.31, Ar.Fr. 451, Is.8.16, Alex.248, Demetr.Com. Nov.1.5, IG22.654.23 (iii B. C.), Plb.3.26.1, 11.14.3, 28.14.3;

    ἡ π. θάλασσαν Μακεδονία Th.2.99

    , cf. S.El. 184 (lyr.), Tr. 636 (lyr.);

    Καρβασυανδῆς π. Καῦνον IG12.204.52

    ;

    τὸ κουρεῖον τὸ π. τοὺς Ἑρμᾶς Lys.23.3

    , cf. And.1.62, Is.6.20, 8.35, Aeschin. 1.182, 3.88, Lycurg.112;

    τᾶς παστάδος τᾶς παρ' Ἀπόλλωνα IG42

     (1).109 iii 146 (Epid.); παρ' ὄμμα before one's eyes, E.Supp. 484; π. πόδας on the spot, Phld.Ir.p.78 W., Rh.2.2 S.; immediately thereafter, Plb.1.7.5, 1.8.2, al.
    b [dialect] Dor., [dialect] Boeot., and Thess., = supr. B. 11.2, at the house of.., with a person, IG7.3171.7 (Orchom. [dialect] Boeot.), GDI 1717 (Delph.); παρ' ἁμὲ πολυτίματος [ὁ σῖτος] Ar.Ach. 759 (Megar.);

    τοῖς κατοικέντεσσι πὰρ ἀμμέ IG9(2).517.18

     (Larissa, iii B. C.); τοῖ πὰρ ἀμμὲ πολιτεύματος ib.13;

    πεπολιτευκὼρ πὰρ ἁμέ Schwyzer 425.5

     (Elis, iii/ii B. C.): so in [dialect] Att., θέμενος π. γυναῖκας depositing with.., Pl. R. 465c.
    3 with Verbs of striking, wounding, etc.,

    βάλε στῆθος π. μαζόν Il.4.480

    , etc.;

    τὸν δ' ἕτερον.. κληῗδα παρ' ὦμον πλῆξε 5.146

    ;

    τύψε κατὰ κληῗδα παρ' αὐχένα 21.117

    , cf. 4.525, 8.325, etc.;

    αἰχμὴ δ' ἐξελύθη παρὰ νείατον ἀνθερεῶνα 5.293

    , cf. 17.310; δησάμενος τελαμῶνι π. σφυρόν ib. 290.
    4 with Verbs of placing, examining, etc., side by side with..,

    ὁ ἔλεγχος π. τὸν ἔλεγχον παραβαλλόμενος Pl.Grg. 475e

    , cf. Hp.Mi. 369c, Smp. 214c, R. 348a;

    ἐξέτασον παρ' ἄλληλα τὰ σοὶ κἀμοὶ βεβιωμένα D.18.265

    ;

    ἄλλα παρ' ἄλλατιθέμενα.. τῶν χρωμάτων Arist.Mete. 375a24

    .
    b Geom., παραβάλλειν π. apply an area to (i. e. along) a finite straight line, Euc.1.44, Archim.Aequil.2.1;

    π. τὴν δοθεῖσαν αὐτοῦ γραμμὴν παρατείναντα Pl. Men. 87a

    ; ἡ [εὐθεῖα] παρ' ἣν δύνανται αἱ καταγόμεναι τεταγμένως the line to which are applied the squares of the or dinates, etc., Apollon. Perg.Con.1.11: hence,
    c Arith., παραβάλλειν τι π. τι divide by.. (v.

    παραβάλλω A.

     VII. 2);

    μερίζω τι π. τι Dioph.4.33

    ; ἐπὶ γ π. ί multiply by 3 and divide by 10, PLond.5.1718.2 (vi A. D.).
    5 Geom., parallel to.., Democr.155, Arist. Top. 158b31, Archim.Sph. Cyl.1.12, al.
    6 metaph. in Gramm., like, as a parody of.., π. τὸ Σοφόκλειον, π. τὰ ἐν Τεύκρῳ Σοφοκλέους, Sch.Ar.Av. 1240, Nu. 584.
    b Gramm., of words which differ as compared with other words, π. τὸ τοῦ ἔρωτος ὄνομα σμικρὸν παρηγμένον ἐστίν.. [τὸ ἥρως] Pl.Cra. 398d, cf. 399a, Lg. 654a: hence, derived from.., π. τὸ ἔδαφος, δάπεδον, A.D. Pron.31.16; π. τὸ δρῶ δρᾶμα Sch.A.R.2.624;

    σύγκειται [τὸ αὐθέντης] π. τὸ εἷναι.. καὶ π. τὸ αὐτός Phryn.PSp.24

     B.
    7 generally, of Comparison, alongside of, compared with, usu. implying superiority,

    δοκέοντες π. ταῦτα οὐδ' ἂν τοὺς σοφωτάτους ἀνθρώπων Αἰγυπτίους οὐδὲν ἐπεξευρεῖν Hdt.2.160

    , cf. 7.20, 103;

    ἡλίου ἐκλείψεις αἳ πυκνότεραι π. τὰ ἐκ τοῦ πρὶν χρόνου μνημονευόμενα ξυνέβησαν Th.1.23

    , cf. 4.6;

    τῶν ἁπάντων ἀπερίοπτοί εἰσι π. τὸ νικᾶν Id.1.41

    ;

    π. τὰ ἄλλα ζῷα ὥσπερ θεοὶ ἄνθρωποι βιοτεύουσι X.Mem.1.4.14

    ;

    φαίνεται π. τὸ ἀλγεινὸν ἡδὺ καὶ π. τὸ ἡδὺ ἀλγεινὸν ἡ ἡσυχία Pl.R. 584a

    , cf. Phdr. 236d, La. 183c, al.;

    εὐδαίμων μᾶλλον π. πάντας BCH26.332

     ([place name] Halae);

    προετέρει π. πάντας PSI 4.422.34

     (iii B. C.): sts. implying inferiority or defect, ἠλάττωσας αὐτὸν βραχύ τι παρ' ἀγγέλους a little lower than the angels, LXX Ps. 8.6; μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ ὑστεροῦσι π. τὸν ἥλιον lag one day behind the sun, Gem.8.19; so perh. παρ' αὐτόν, ὑπὲρ αὐτόν (has passed the ball?) short of him, beyond him, Antiph.234; μέγα τοι ἡμέρα παρ' ἡμέραν γιγνομένη γνώμην ἐξ ὀργῆς μεταστῆσαι one day compared with another is important.., a day's delay makes a difference, Antipho 5.72; τί γὰρ παρ' ἦμαρ ἡμέρα τέρπειν ἔχει προσθεῖσα κἀναθεῖσα τοῦ γε κατθανεῖν; what joy has one day compared with another to offer, since it only brings us nearer to, or farther from, death (which is neither good nor evil)? S.Aj. 475; ὃς μὲν κρίνει (prefers) ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν, ὃς δὲ κρίνει (approves)

    πᾶσαν ἡμέραν Ep.Rom.14.5

    .
    8 with Verbs of estimating, to set at so and so much, hence π. = equivalent to.., ταρβῶ μὴ.. θῆται παρ' οὐδὲν τὰς ἐμὰς ἐπιστολάς set at nought, E.IT 732, cf. A. Ag. 229 (lyr.);

    παρ' οὐδὲν ἄγειν S.Ant.35

    ; π. μικρὸν ἡγεῖσθαι or ποιεῖσθαί τι hold of small account, Isoc.5.79, D.61.51;

    παρ' ὀλίγον ποιεῖσθαί τινα X.An.6.6.11

    ; so with εἶναι, etc., παρ' οὐδέν ἐστι are as nothing, S.OT 983, cf. Ant. 466;

    παρ' οὐδὲν αὐταῖς ἦν ἂν ὀλλύναι πόσεις E.Or. 569

    ;

    οὐ π. μέγα ἔσεσθαι τὸ πταῖσμα Arr.An.1.18.6

    ; so perh. π. σμικρὰ κεχώρηκε have turned out of little account, have amounted to little, Hdt.1.120.
    b in Accountancy, without a verb, π. τὴν καταλλαγήν on account of κ., PHib.1.100.4 (iii B. C.).
    9 of correspondence, ὀφείλειν στατῆρα π. στατῆρα stater for stater (one to each of two creditors), BCH50.214 (Thasos, v B. C.);

    πληγὴν π. πληγὴν ἑκάτερον Ar.Ra. 643

    ; συνεῖναι ἑκατέρῳ ἡμέραν παρ' ἡμέραν stayed day for day with each, D.59.46; hence of alternation, ποιεῖσθαι ἁγνείας καὶ θυσίας δύο π. δύο, of four priests acting two and two alternately, BGU1198.12 (i B. C.); τοῦ καθημερινοῦ ἢ μίαν π. μίαν (sc. ἡμέραν) [πυρετοῦ] quotidian or tertian fever, ib.956.3 (iii A. D.): sts. without doubling of the Noun, παρ' ἡμέρην, opp. καθ' ἡμέρην, tertian, opp. quotidian, Hp.Aph.1.12; καθ' ἡμέραν, παρ' ἡμέραν, π. δύο, π. τρεῖς every day, every second day, every third (fourth) day, Arr.Epict.2.18.13; π. μίαν every second day, Plb.3.110.4; παρ' ἐνιαυτόν every second year, Plu.Cleom.15; παρ' ἔτος year and year about, Arist.GA 757a7; every second year, Paus.8.15.2; π. μέρος by turns (v. μέρος II. 2);

    ὁ ἀνὰ μέρος παρ' ἓξ μῆνας ὑπὲρ γῆν τε καὶ ὑπὸ γῆν γινόμενος Ἄδωνις Corn. ND28

    ; π. μῆνα τρίτον every third month, Arist.HA 582b4, cf. Plu.2.942e; but π. τρία [ἔτεα] prob. every fourth year, IG5(2).422 ([place name] Phigalea), cf. Arr.Epict. l.c.; ἕνα παρ' ἕνα παραλειπτέον every second one, Nicom.Ar.1.18; ἕνα π. δύο ([etym.] τρεῖς) every third (fourth) one, ibid.; παρὰ δ' ἄλλαν ἄλλα μοῖρα διώκει now one now another, E.Heracl. 611.
    10 precisely at the moment of, παρ' αὐτὰ τἀδικήματα flagrante delicto, D.18.13, 21.26;

    ἀποδώσω π. τὸν εὔθυνον τὸ καθῆκον IG12.188.31

    ; π. τοιοῦτον καιρόν, π. τὰς χρείας, D.20.41,46; π. τὰ δεινά in the midst of danger, Plu.Ant.63;

    π. τὴν πρώτην γένεσιν Jul.Or.1.10b

    ; π. τὴν πρώτην (sc. ἐπίθεσιν) at the first attack, Hld.9.2;

    π. γε τὴν πρώτην ὁρμήν Ael.NA14.10

    .
    b distributively, whether of Time, π. τὰ ἑβδομήκοντα ἔτεα in each complete period of seventy years, Hdt.1.32;

    ἐν ταῖς ὁδοιπορίαις π. στάδια διακόσια.. τοῖς ἑκατὸν σταδίοις διήνεγκαν ἀλλήλων X.Oec.20.18

    ; πὰρ Ϝέτος each year, every year, Tab.Heracl. 1.101;

    π. τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ἕκαστον IG12(7).5.14

     ([place name] Amorgos); παρ' ἆμάρ τε καὶ νύκτα day and night, B.Fr.7; or more generally, πὰρ τὰν ἐλαίαν in respect of each olive plant, Tab.Heracl.1.122; παρ' ἡμέραν αἱ ἀμίαι πολὺ ἐπιδήλως αὐξάνονται from day to day, per day, Arist.HA 571a21;

    τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην βάσιν γινόμενον μικρὸν πολὺ γίνεται π. πολλάς Id.Pr. 881b26

    ;

    ἡ παρ' ἡμέραν χάρις D.8.70

    ;

    τὸ παρ' ἑκάστην ἡμέραν ἡδύ Pl. Lg. 705a

    .
    c παρ' ἆμαρ on (this) day, to-day, τὸ μὲν πὰρ ἆμαρ, τὸ δέ .. to-day and to-morrow, Pi.P.11.63; but παρ' ἦμαρ to-morrow, S. OC 1455 (lyr.).
    d throughout a period of time,

    π. τὴν ζόην Hdt. 7.46

    ;

    π. τὸν βίον ἅπαντα Pl.Lg. 733a

    ;

    π. πάντα τὸν χρόνον D.18.10

    ; also more loosely, during, π. τὴν πόσιν while they were drinking, Hdt.2.121.

    δ; π. τὸν πότον Aeschin.2.156

    ;

    π. τὴν κύλικα Plu.Ant.24

    ; π. δεῖπνον or π. τὸ δεῖπνον, Id.2.737a,674f.
    II along,

    ὄνος παρ' ἄρουραν ἰών Il.11.558

    ;

    βῆ δὲ θέειν π. τεῖχος 12.352

    ;

    π. ῥόον Ὠκεανοῖο ᾔομεν Od. 11.21

    ;

    ἔπλεον π. τὴν ἤπειρον Hdt.7.193

    ;

    π. πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδόν Isoc.4.148

    ; ὀρθὴν παρ' οἶμον.. τύμβον κατόψει straight along the road, E.Alc. 835;

    παρ' ὅλην τὴν φάραγγα Plb.10.30.3

    ; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χαράδραν παραπορευομένων ib.9; for παραβάλλειν π., v. supr. c. 1.4b.
    2 strictly according to, without deviating from,

    εἶμι π. στάθμην ὀρθὴν ὁδόν Thgn. 945

    , cf. S.Fr.474.5; ὠμοί τε δούλοις πάντα καὶ π. στάθμην, i.e. too strict, A.Ag. 1045; π. τὸν λόγον ὃν ἀποφέρουσιν.. ἐπιδείξω I will prove to you strictly according to the accounts which they themselves submit, D.27.34.
    III past, beyond,

    παρὰ σκοπιὴν καὶ ἐρινεὸν ἠνεμόεντα.. ἐσσεύοντο Il.22.145

    , cf. Od.3.172, 24.12;

    βῆ δὲ π. Κρουνούς h.Ap. 425

    ; π. τὴν Βαβυλῶνα παριέναι pass by Babylon, X.Cyr.5.2.29; παρ' αὐτὴν τὴν χύτραν ἄκραν ὁρῶντες looking over the edge of.., Ar.Av. 390.
    2 metaph., over and above, in addition to,

    οὐκ ἔστι π. ταῦτ' ἄλλα Id.Nu. 698

    ;

    π. ταῦτα πάντα ἕτερόν τι Pl.Phd. 74a

    , cf.R. 337d, D.18.139, X.HG 1.5.5; ἑκὼν ἐπόνει π. τοὺς ἄλλους more than the others, Id.Ages.5.3, cf. Mem.4.4.1, Oec.20.16;

    ἃ τῷ ῥαψῳδῷ προσήκει καὶ σκοπεῖσθαι καὶ διακρίνειν π. τοὺς ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους Pl. Ion 539e

    .
    3 metaph., in excess over, πὰρ δύναμιν beyond one's strength, Il.13.787, cf. Th.1.70, Hyp.Lyc.16, Arist.Rh.Al. 1423b29;

    π. τὴν δ. Id.Po. 1451b38

    .
    4 metaph., in transgression or violation of,

    π. μοῖραν Od.14.509

    ;

    π. μοῖραν Δίος Alc.Supp. 14.10

    ; παρ' αἶσαν, παρὰ δίκαν, Pi.P.8.13, O.2.16, etc.;

    π. τὸ δίκαιον Th.5.90

    , etc.; π. τὰς σπονδάς, τὸν νόμον, Id.1.67, X.HG1.7.14;

    π. φύσιν Th.6.17

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 747b; π. τὴν στήλην prob. in IG12.45.20; π. καιρόν out of season, Pi.O.8.24, etc.; π. γνώμαν ib.12.10, cf. A.Supp. 454; π. δόξαν, π. τὸ δοκοῦν ἡμῖν, π. λόγον, Th.3.93, 1.84, Plb.2.38.5; παρ' ἐλπίδα or ἐλπίδας, A.Ag. 899, S.Ant. 392, etc.; πὰρ μέλος out of tune, Pi.N.7.69;

    π. τὴν ἀξίαν Th.7.77

    , etc.; π. τὸ εἰωθός, τὸ καθεστηκός, Id.4.17, 1.98.
    5 π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, = παρῆλθε τοσοῦτον κινδύνου, passed over so much ground within the sphere of danger, i.e. incurred such imminent peril, Id.3.49, cf. 7.2; in such phrases the tmesis was forgotten, and the acc. came to be governed by παρά, which thus came to mean 'by such and such a margin', ' with so much to spare', ἐνίκησαν π. πολύ, ἡσσηθέντες π. πολύ, Id.1.29, 2.89, cf. Pl. Ap. 36a; παρὰ δ' ὀλίγον ἀπέφυγες only just, E.IT 870 (lyr.);

    παρ' ὀλίγον ἢ διέφευγον ἢ ἀπώλλυντο Th.7.71

    ; δεινότατον π. πολύ by far, Ar.Pl. 445; παρ' ὅσον quatenus, Luc.Nec.17, etc.; π. δύο ψήφους ἀπέφυγε by two votes, Hyp.Eux.28, cf. D.23.205;

    π. τέτταρας ψήφους μετέσχε τῆς πόλεως Is.3.37

    ; π. τοσοῦτον ἐγένετο αὐτῷ μὴ περιπεσεῖν by so much (= little) he missed falling in with.., Th.8.33; π. πέντε ναῦς πλέον ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ ἢ τρεῖς ὀβολοὶ ὡμολογήθησαν ib.29; οὐ π. μικρὸν ἐποίησαν they made no little difference, Isoc.4.59.
    b in phrases like π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε κινδύνου, τοσοῦτον was sts. understood of the interval from danger, etc., and παρά came to mean 'by so much short of' (

    τὸ π. μικρὸν ὥσπερ οὐδὲν ἀπέχειν δοκεῖ Arist.Ph. 197a29

    ), within such and such a distance of, so near to, τὴν Ἠϊόνα π. νύκτα ἐγένετο (sc. αὐτῷ) λαβεῖν he was within one night of taking E., Th.4.106; π. μικρὸν ἦλθον ἀποθανεῖν I came within a little of.., Isoc. 19.22, cf. Plb.1.43.7, Plu. Caes. 39; παρ' ἐλάχιστον ἦλθε.. ἀφελέσθαι was within an ace of taking away, Th.8.76; παρ' οὐδὲν μὲν ἦλθον ἀποκτεῖναι (were within a mere nothing, within an ace of killing him),

    ἐξεκήρυξαν δ' ἐκ πόλεως Aeschin. 3.258

    , cf. Plu.Pyrrh. 14, Alex.62; π. τοσοῦτον ἦλθε διαφυγεῖν so near he came to escaping, Luc.Cat.4;

    παρὰ ἓν πάλαισμα ἔδραμε νικᾶν Ὀλυμπιάδα Hdt.9.33

    ;

    παρ' οὐδὲν ἐλθόντες τοῦ ἀποβαλεῖν Plb.1.45.14

    , cf. 2.55.4, D.S.17.42: hence without ἐγένετο or ἐλθεῖν, π. μίαν μονάδα (less) by one, i.e. less one, Nicom.Ar.1.8; τεσσαράκοντα π. μίαν, = 39, 2 Ep.Cor.11.24; παρ' ἕνα τοσοῦτοι the same number less one, Plu. Publ.9; σύ μοι παρ' ἕνα ἥκεις ἄγων you have brought me one too few, Luc.Cat.4;

    δύναται π. δύο συλλαβὰς εἶναι τὸ καταληκτόν Heph.4.2

    ; τὰ ὁλοκόττινα ηὑρέθησαν π. ἑπτὰ κεράτια seven carats short, PMasp.70.2 (vi A. D.); πάντες παρ' ἕνα, πάντες παρ' ὀλίγους, all save one (a few), Plu.Cat.Mi.20, Ant.5;

    ἔτη δύο π. ἡμέρας δύο IG5(1).801

     ([place name] Laconia); of one Μάρκος, θηρίον εἶ π. γράμμα you are a bear ([etym.] ἄρκος) all but a letter, AP11.231 (Ammian.); ὡς π. τι καὶ τὰς ὄψεις ἀφανίσαι so that he all but (lit. less something) lost his sight, Vett.Val.228.6; π. τι βυθίζεσθαι v.l. in Ev.Luc.5.7; τὸ π. τοῦτο the figure less that, i.e. the remainder or difference, PTeb.99.10 (ii B. C.), cf. POxy.264.4 (i A. D.), PAmh.2.148.5 (v A. D.); hence of any difference whether of excess or defect, οὐδὲν π. τοῦτο ποιούμενοι τοὺς.. Λευκανούς τε καὶ τοὺς.. Σαυνίτας making no difference between.., Str.6.1.3, cf. 14.5.11, Plu.2.24c.
    6 hence of the margin by which anything increases or decreases, and so of the cause according to which anything comes into existence or varies,

    τὸ εὖ π. μικρὸν διὰ πολλῶν ἀριθμῶν γίνεται Polyclit.2

     (cf. μικρός III. 5 c); διαφέρει π. τὰς τῶν παθημάτων ἐναντιώσεις according to.., Arist.HA 486b5;

    μεταπίπτει π. τὰ κλίματα Gem. 5.29

    , cf. 11.5, al.; π. τὰ πράγματα cj. in Apollod.Car.11.
    7 more generally of the margin by which an event occurs, i.e. of the necessary and sufficient cause or motive (

    τὸ μὴ π. τοῦτο γίνεσθαι τότε λέγομεν, ὅταν ἀναιρεθέντος τούτου μηδὲν ἧττον περαίνηται ὁ συλλογισμός Arist.APr. 65b6

    , cf. 48a24, al.), κεινὰν π. δίαιταν just for the sake of unsatisfying food, Pi.O.2.65; ἕκαστος οὐ π. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀμέλειαν οἴεται βλάψειν each thinks that his own negligence will not suffice to cause injury, Th.1.141, cf. Isoc.3.48; π. τὴν αὑτοῦ ἁμαρτίαν all through his own fault, Antipho 3.4.5, cf. Isoc.6.52, D.4.11, 18.232; πολλὰ.. ἐστιν αἴτια τούτων, καὶ οὐ παρ' ἓν οὐδὲ δύ' εἰς τοῦτο τὰ πράγματ' ἀφῖκται not from one or two causes only, Id.9.2; οὐ π. τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστι it does not follow that it is not.., 1 Ep.Cor.12.15; π. τὸ τὴν ἀρίθμησιν ποιήσασθαι ἐξ ἑτοίμου τοὺς ἐργώνας οὐκ ὀλίγα χρήματα περιεποίησε τῇ πόλει by the simple fact of prompt payment, IPE12.32B35 (Olbia, iii B. C.);

    οὐδὲν ἂν παρ' ἕνα ἄνθρωπον ἐγένετο τούτων Lycurg.63

    , cf. Plb.3.103.2, 18.28.6, al.; οὐδεὶς παρ' ἑαυτόν ἐστι βασιλεύς thanks to himself alone, Aristeas 224;

    παρ' αὑτὸν ἀτυχεῖ Arr.Epict.3.24.2

    , cf. Phld.Rh.2.16 S.;

    παρ' ἡμᾶς ἡ τῶν ἀγαθῶν ἀπόστασις Hierocl. in CA25p.477M.

    ; εἶναι π. τοῦτο σωτηρίαν τε πόλει καὶ τοὐναντίον, i.e. on this depends.., Pl.Lg. 715d, cf. X.Eq.Mag.1.5, D.C.Fr.36.5;

    π. μίαν ἡμέραν καὶ ἓν πρᾶγμα καὶ ἀπόλλυται προκοπὴ καὶ σῴζεται Epict.Ench.51.2

    ; π. τὸ Ἕλληνά με εἶναι just because I am a Greek, UPZ7.13 (ii B. C.);

    π. τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν αὐτήν LXX Ge.29.20

    , cf. Ex.14.11; later more loosely, because of.., Phld.Rh.1.158 S., Gem.6.24, etc.; οὐδὲν π. σὲ γέγονε it is no fault of yours, PRyl.243.6 (ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1420.7 (ii A. D.).
    8 of a limit of possibility,

    εἴπερ ἐνεδέχετο π. τοὺς παρόντας καιρούς D.18.239

    ; πεῖσαι τό γε παρ' αὑτόν to persuade (the judges) so far as in you lies, Arr.Epict.2.2.20; οἴμωζε παρ' ἐμέ as far as I am concerned, for all I care, Ar.Av. 846.
    D POSITION: παρά may follow its Subst. in all three cases, but then becomes by anastrophe πάρα: when the ult. is elided, the practice varies,

    τῇσι παρ' Il.18.400

    ; but Ἡφαίστοιο πάρ' ib. 191.
    E παρά abs., as ADV., near, together, Il.1.611, al., E.IA 201 (lyr.).
    F πάρα (with anastrophe) stands for πάρεστι and πάρεισι, Il.1.174, Hes.Op. 454, A.Pers. 167, Hdt.1.42, al., S.El. 285, Ar.Ach. 862, etc.
    I alongside of, beside, of rest, παράκειμαι, παράλληλοι, παρέζομαι, πάρειμι (εἰμί), παρίστημι; of motion, παραπλέω, πάρειμι ([etym.] εἶμι).
    II to the side of, to, παραδίδωμι, παρέχω.
    III to one side of, by, past, παρέρχομαι, παροίχομαι, παραπέμπω, παρακμάζω, παρατρέχω.
    IV metaph.,
    1 aside or beyond, i.e. amiss, wrong, παραβαίνω, παράγω, παροράω, παρορκέω, παρακούω, παραγιγνώσκω.
    2 of comparison, as in παραβάλλω, παρατίθημι.
    3 of alteration or change, as in παραλλάσσω, παραπείθω, παραπλάσσω, παρατεκταίνω, παραυδάω, παράφημι.
    4 of a side-issue, παραπόλλυμι. (Cogn. with Goth. faúr 'along', Lat. por-.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > παρά

  • 3 κατά

    κατά (Hom.+) prep. (s. the lit. s.v. ἀνά beg., also LfgrE s.v. κατά 1346; with the gen. 74 times in NT; w. acc. 391 times in NT).
    A. w. the gen.
    ⓐ of location that is relatively lower, down from someth. (Hom. et al.; LXX; Ath. 1, 4 κ. κόρρης προπηλακίζειν=to smack on one side of the head) ὁρμᾶν κ. τοῦ κρημνοῦ rush down (from) the bank (cp. Polyb. 38, 16, 7 κ. τῶν κρημνῶν ῥίπτειν; Jos., Bell. 1, 313) Mt 8:32; Mk 5:13; Lk 8:33. κ. κεφαλῆς ἔχειν have someth. on one’s head (lit. hanging down fr. the head, as a veil. Cp. Plut., Mor. 200f ἐβάδιζε κ. τῆς κεφαλῆς ἔχων τὸ ἱμάτιον.; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 499, 5 of a mummy ἔχων τάβλαν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου) 1 Cor 11:4.
    ⓑ of position relatively deep, into someth. (Od. 9, 330 κ. σπείους ‘into the depths of the cave’; Hdt. 7, 235; X., An. 7, 1, 30) ἡ κ. βάθους πτωχεία extreme (lit. ‘reaching down into the depths’; cp. Strabo 9, 3, 5 [419] ἄντρον κοῖλον κ. βάθους) or abysmal poverty 2 Cor 8:2. This may perh. be the mng. of πλήσσειν τινὰ κ. τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν strike someone deep into the eyes ApcPt 11:26 (cp. Demosth. 19, 197 ξαίνει κ. τοῦ νώτου; PPetr II, 18 [2b], 15 [246 B.C.] ἔτυπτεν αὐτὸν κ. τοῦ τραχήλου).—κ. γαστρός Just., D. 78, 3 for ἐν γαστρί Mt 1:18 (cp. Ath. 35, 2 τὸ κ. γαστρὸς ζῶον εἶναι).
    ⓒ extension in various directions within an area, throughout (so in Luke’s writings; Polyb. 3, 19, 7 κ. τῆς νήσου διεσπάρησαν; PGiss 48, 8 κ. κυριακῆς γῆς; Jos., Ant. 8, 297; SibOr 3, 222; 4, 24; 5, 305) γνωστὸν γενέσθαι καθʼ ὅλης Ἰόππης become known throughout all Joppa Ac 9:42. καθʼ ὅλης τῆς Ἰουδαίας 9:31; 10:37; Lk 23:5. φήμη ἐξῆλθεν καθʼ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου 4:14.
    ② down upon, toward, against someone or someth, fig. ext. of 1.
    ⓐ w. verbs of swearing, to denote what one swears by (Thu. 5, 47, 8; Lysias 32, 13; Isaeus 7, 28; Demosth. 21, 119; 29, 26; SIG 526, 4ff; 685, 25; UPZ 110, 39 [164 B.C.]; BGU 248, 13; Jdth 1:12; Is 45:23; 2 Ch 36:13) by ἐξορκίζειν (q.v.) Mt 26:63. ὀμνύναι (q.v.) Hb 6:13, 16. ὁρκίζειν (q.v.) Hs 9, 10, 5. Sim. ἐρωτᾶν κ. τινος request, entreat by someone Hv 3, 2, 3.
    ⓑ in a hostile sense, against
    α. after verbs that express hostile action, etc. διχάζειν Mt 10:35. ἐπαίρεσθαι 2 Cor 10:5. ἰσχύειν Ac 19:16. κακοῦν 14:2. στρατεύεσθαι 1 Pt 2:11. φυσιοῦσθαι 1 Cor 4:6
    β. after words and expressions that designate hostile speech, esp. an accusation ἔχειν (τι) κ. τινος have or hold someth. against someone Rv 2:4, 14, 20. φέρειν J 18:29. ἐγκαλεῖν Ro 8:33. ἐντυγχάνειν τινὶ κ. τινος 11:2 (TestJob 17:5). κατηγορεῖν Lk 23:14. ποιεῖν κρίσιν Jd 15a. τὸ κ. ἡμῶν χειρόγραφον the bond that stands against us Col 2:14. ἐμφανίζειν Ac 24:1; 25:2. αἰτεῖσθαί τι 25:3, 15. αἱ κ. τινος αἰτίαι vs. 27. εἰπεῖν πονηρόν Mt 5:11 (cp. Soph., Phil. 65 κακὰ λέγειν κ. τινος. X., Hell. 1, 5, 2; Isocr., C. Nic. 13; Plut., Mor. 2a λέγειν κ.; SIG 1180, 1 λέγειν κ. τινος; Just., A I, 23, 3; 49, 6 κ. τῶν … ὁμολογούντων). λαλεῖν ῥήματα Ac 6:13; cp. Jd 15b (TestDan 4:3; JosAs 23:15). μαρτυρεῖν κ. τ. θεοῦ give testimony in contradiction to God 1 Cor 15:15. ζητεῖν μαρτυρίαν κ. τινος testimony against someone Mk 14:55. ψευδομαρτυρεῖν 14:56f. ψευδομαρτυρία Mt 26:59. γογγύζειν 20:11. στενάζειν Js 5:9. διδάσκειν Ac 21:28. συμβούλιον διδόναι (ποιεῖν v.l.) Mk 3:6; ς. λαβεῖν Mt 27:1. ψεύδεσθαι Js 3:14 (Lysias 22, 7; X., Ap. 13; Ath. 35, 1 καθʼ ἡμῶν … κατεψεύσατο).
    γ. after expressions that designate such a position or state of mind in a different way εἶναι κ. τινος be against someone (opp. ὑπέρ) Mk 9:40 (WNestle, ZNW 13, 1912, 84–87; AFridrichsen, ibid., 273–80); Ro 8:31; (opp. μετά) Mt 12:30; Lk 11:23. δύνασθαί τι κ. τινος be able to do someth. against someone 2 Cor 13:8. ἔχειν τι κ. τινος have someth. against someone (in one’s heart) Mt 5:23; Mk 11:25; Hs 9, 24, 2; cp. ibid. 23, 2, where the acc. is to be supplied. ἐξουσίαν ἔχειν J 19:11. ἐπιθυμεῖν Gal 5:17. μερίζεσθαι καθʼ ἑαυτῆς Mt 12:25. Cp. 1 Cl 39:4 (Job 4:18).—κατά prob. means against also in ἔβαλεν κατʼ αὐτῆς ἄνεμος Ac 27:14. ἐτελείωσαν κ. τ. κεφαλῆς αὐτῶν τὰ ἁμαρτήματα they completed the full measure of sins against their own head GPt 5:17.
    B. w. acc. (so in the NT 399 times [besides καθʼ εἷς and κατὰ εἷς])
    ⓐ of extension in space, along, over, through, in, upon (Hom. et al.; OGI 90, 7 ἐκ τῶν κ. τ. χώραν ἱερῶν; PHib 82, 19; PTebt 5, 188; LXX; Just.; Mel., HE 4, 26, 5) Ac 24:12. καθʼ ὅλην τ. πόλιν throughout the city Lk 8:39 (cp. Diod S 4, 10, 6 καθʼ ὅλην τὴν Ἐλλάδα). ἐγένετο λιμὸς κ. τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην 15:14. κ. τὰς κώμας 9:6. κ. πόλεις καὶ κώμας 13:22 (Appian., Maced. 9 §1 and 4 κ. πόλεις; Just., A I, 67, 3 κ. πόλεις ἢ ἀγρούς).—κ. τόπους in place after place Mt 24:7; Mk 13:8; Lk 21:11 (Theophr., περὶ σημ. 1, 4 p. 389 W.; Cat. Cod. Astr. III 28, 11 ἐν μέρει τ. ἀνατολῆς κ. τόπους, VIII/3, 186, 1 λιμὸς καὶ λοιμὸς καὶ σφαγαὶ κ. τόπους). οἱ ὄντες κ. τὴν Ἰουδαίαν those throughout Judea or living in Judea Ac 11:1. διασπαρῆναι κ. τὰς χώρας τῆς Ἰουδαίας be scattered over the regions of Judea 8:1. κ. τὴν οὖσαν ἐκκλησίαν in the congregation there 13:1. τοῖς κ. τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν καὶ Συρίαν καὶ Κιλικίαν ἀδελφοῖς 15:23. τοὺς κ. τὰ ἔθνη Ἰουδαίους the Judeans (dispersed) throughout the nations 21:21. τοῖς κ. τὸν νόμον γεγραμμένοις throughout the law = in the law 24:14b. κ. τὴν ὁδόν along or on the way (Lucian, Catapl. 4; Jos., Ant. 8, 404) Lk 10:4; Ac 25:3; 26:13. τὸ κ. Κιλικίαν καὶ Παμφυλίαν πέλαγος the sea along the coast of Cilicia and Pamphylia 27:5; but the geographical designation τὰ μέρη τ. Λιβύης τῆς κ. Κυρήνην 2:10 prob. belongs to b: the parts of Libya toward Cyrene.
    ⓑ of extension toward, toward, to, up to ἐλθεῖν (γίνεσθαι v.l.) κ. τὸν τόπον come up to the place (Jos., Vi. 283) Lk 10:32. ἐλθόντες κ. τὴν Μυσίαν to Mysia Ac 16:7; cp. 27:7. πορεύεσθαι κ. μεσημβρίαν (s. μεσημβρία 2) toward the south 8:26 (cp. Jos., Bell. 5, 505). κ. σκοπὸν διώκειν run (over the course) toward the goal Phil 3:14. λιμὴν βλέπων κ. λίβα καὶ κ. χῶρον a harbor open to the southwest and northwest Ac 27:12 (s. βλέπω 8).—κ. πρόσωπον to the face (cp. Jos., Ant. 5, 205) Gal 2:11. ἔχειν τινὰ κ. πρόσωπον meet someone face to face (Thieme 19 has reff. for the use of κατὰ πρόσωπον as a legal formula) Ac 25:16. κ. πρόσωπον ταπεινός humble when personally present 2 Cor 10:1. κ. πρόσωπόν τινος in the presence of someone Lk 2:31; Ac 3:13. τὰ κ. πρόσωπον what lies before one’s eyes, i.e. is obvious 2 Cor 10:7. κ. ὀφθαλμοὺς προγράφειν portray before one’s eyes Gal 3:1.
    ⓒ of isolation or separateness, by (Thu. 1, 138, 6 οἱ καθʼ ἑαυτοὺς Ἕλληνες ‘the Greeks by themselves’; Polyb. 1, 24, 4; 5, 78, 3; 11, 17, 6; Diod S 13, 72, 8; Gen 30:40; 43:32; 2 Macc 13:13; Philo, Migr. Abr. 87; 90; Just., D. 4, 5 αὐτὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν γενομένη; Tat. 13, 1 ἡ ψυχὴ καθʼ ἑαυτήν; Ath. 15, 2 ὁ πηλὸς καθʼ ἑαυτόν) ἔχειν τι καθʼ ἑαυτόν keep someth. to oneself Ro 14:22 (cp. Jos., Ant. 2, 255; Heliod. 7, 16, 1). καθʼ ἑαυτὸν μένειν live by oneself of the private dwelling of Paul in Rome Ac 28:16. πίστις νεκρὰ καθʼ ἑαυτήν faith by itself is dead Js 2:17 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 3, 43 τὸ σῶμα καθʼ αὑτὸ νεκρόν ἐστιν). ἡ κατʼ οἶκον ἐκκλησία the congregation in the house Ro 16:5; 1 Cor 16:19. κατʼ ἰδίαν s. ἴδιος 5. κ. μόνας (Thu. 1, 32, 5; Menand., Epitr. 988 S. [658 Kö.], Fgm. 146 Kö. [158 Kock]; Polyb. 4, 15, 11; Diod S 4, 51, 16; BGU 813, 15 [s. APF 2, 1903, 97]; LXX) alone, by oneself Mk 4:10; Lk 9:18; Hm 11:8 (here, as well as BGU loc. cit. and LXX, written as one word καταμόνας).
    ⓓ of places viewed serially, distributive use w. acc., x by x (Arrian., Anab. 4, 21, 10 κ. σκηνήν=tent by tent) or from x to x: κατʼ οἶκον from house to house (PLond III, 904, 20 p. 125 [104 A.D.] ἡ κατʼ οἰκίαν ἀπογραφή) Ac 2:46b; 5:42 (both in ref. to various house assemblies or congregations; w. less probability NRSV ‘at home’); cp. 20:20. Likew. the pl. κ. τοὺς οἴκους εἰσπορευόμενος 8:3. κ. τὰς συναγωγάς 22:19. κ. πόλιν (Jos., Ant. 6, 73) from city to city IRo 9:3, but in every (single) city Ac 15:21; 20:23; Tit 1:5. Also κ. πόλιν πᾶσαν (cp. Herodian 1, 14, 9) Ac 15:36; κ. πᾶσαν πόλιν 20:23 D. κ. πόλιν καὶ κώμην Lk 8:1; cp. vs. 4.
    ② marker of temporal aspect (Hdt. et al.; ins, pap, LXX, apolog.)
    ⓐ in definite indications of time: at, on, during (Hdt. 8, 17; Polemon Soph. B 43 Reader κατʼ ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν ‘in the course of that day’) κατʼ ἀρχάς in the beginning (cp. ἀρχή 1b) Hb 1:10 (Ps 101:26). κ. τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ πειρασμοῦ in the day of trial 3:8 (Ps 94:8.—Cp. Antig. Car. 173 κ. τὸν σπόρου καιρόν). νεκροῦ … ἀνάστασιν κατʼ αὐτὸν γεγονυῖαν ἱστορεῖ (Papias) reports that a resurrection from the dead occurred in his time Papias (2, 9; so, with personal names, Hdt.; Just., D. 23, 1 τοῦ θεοῦ … τοῦ κ. τὸν Ἐνώχ; Tat. 31, 2 Θεαγένης … κ. Καμβύσην γεγονώς). Of the future: κ. τὸν καιρὸν τοῦτον at that time, then Ro 9:9 (Gen 18:10). Of the past: κ. ἐκεῖνον τὸν καιρόν at that time, then (2 Macc 3:5; TestJos 12:1; Jos., Ant. 8, 266; cp. κατʼ ἐκεῖνο τοῦ καιροῦ Konon: 26 Fgm. 3 p. 191, 25 Jac.; Just., A I, 17, 2; 26, 3 al.) Ac 12:1; 19:23. κ. καιρόν at that time, then Ro 5:6 (Just., D. 132, 1; cp. OGI 90, 28 καθʼ ὸ̔ν καιρόν), unless καιρός here means the right time (s. καιρός 1b end). κατʼ ὄναρ (as καθʼ ὕπνον Gen 20:6; Just., D 60, 5 κ. τοὺς ὕπνους) during a dream, in a dream Mt 1:20; 2:12 (s. s.v. ὄναρ for ins).
    ⓑ with indefinite indications of time: toward, about κ. τὸ μεσονύκτιον about midnight Ac 16:25; cp. 27:27.—8:26 (s. μεσημβρία 1).
    ⓒ distributively (cp. 1d): x period by x period: κατʼ ἔτος every year (s. ἔτος) Lk 2:41. Also κατʼ ἐνιαυτόν (s. ἐνιαυτός 1) Hb 9:25; 10:1, 3. καθʼ ἡμέραν daily, every day (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Mt 26:55; Mk 14:49; Lk 16:19; 22:53; Ac 2:46f; 3:2; 16:5; 17:11; 19:9; 1 Cor 15:31; Hb 7:27; 10:11. Also τὸ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Lk 11:3; 19:47; Ac 17:11 v.l. ἡ ἐπίστασις ἡ καθʼ ἡμέραν (s. ἐπίστασις) 2 Cor 11:28. κ. πᾶσαν ἡμέραν every day (Jos., Ant. 6, 49) Ac 17:7. Also καθʼ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν (s. ἡμέρα 2c) Hb 3:13. κ. μίαν σαββάτου on the first day of every week 1 Cor 16:2. κ. πᾶν σάββατον every Sabbath Ac 13:27; 15:21b; 18:4. κ. μῆνα ἕκαστον each month Rv 22:2 (κ. μῆνα as SIG 153, 65; POxy 275, 18; 2 Macc 6:7). κ. ἑορτήν at each festival Mt 27:15; Mk 15:6.
    ③ marker of division of a greater whole into individual parts, at a time, in detail, distributive use apart from indications of place (s. above 1d) and time (s. 2c)
    ⓐ w. numerals: κ. δύο ἢ τὸ πλεῖστον τρεῖς two or, at the most, three at a time (i.e. in any one meeting, cp. ἀνὰ μέρος) 1 Cor 14:27 (Dio Chrys. 80 [30], 42 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς; Jos., Ant. 3, 142 κ. ἕξ; 5, 172 κ. δύο καὶ τρεῖς). καθʼ ἕνα (on this and the foll. s. εἷς 5e) singly, one after the other vs. 31. κ. ἕνα λίθον each individual stone Hs 9, 3, 5; καθʼ ἕνα λίθον 9, 6, 3. κ. ἓν ἕκαστον one by one, in detail Ac 21:19; 1 Cl 32:1 (Ath. 28, 4 καθʼ ἕκαστον). εἷς καθʼ εἷς Mk 14:19; J 8:9; cp. Ro 12:5 (B-D-F §305; Rob. 460). κ. ἑκατὸν καὶ κ. πεντήκοντα in hundreds and in fifties Mk 6:40.
    ⓑ περί τινος λέγειν κ. μέρος speak of someth. in detail Hb 9:5 (s. μέρος 1c). κατʼ ὄνομα (each one) by name (ἀσπάζομαι … τοὺς ἐνοίκους πάντες κα[τʼ] ὄνομα PTebt [III A.D.] 422, 11–16; Jos., Vi. 86) J 10:3; 3J 15 (cp. BGU 27, 18); ISm 13:2.
    ④ marker of intention or goal, for the purpose of, for, to (Thu. 6, 31, 1 κ. θέαν ἥκειν=to look at something; cp. Sb 7263, 6 [254 B.C.]; X., An. 3, 5, 2 καθʼ ἁρπαγὴν ἐσκεδασμένοι; Arrian, Anab. 1, 17, 12; 4, 5, 1; 21, 9; 6, 17, 6; 26, 2; Lucian, Ver. Hist. 2, 29; Anton. Lib., Fab. 24, 1 Δημήτηρ ἐπῄει γῆν ἅπασαν κ. ζήτησιν τῆς θυγατρός; 38; Jdth 11:19) κ. τὸν καθαρισμὸν τῶν Ἰουδαίων for the Jewish ceremonial purification J 2:6. κατὰ ἀτιμίαν λέγω to my shame 2 Cor 11:21 (cp. Jos., Ant. 3, 268 κ. τιμὴν τ. θεοῦ τοῦτο ποιῶν). ἀπόστολος … κ. πίστιν … καὶ ἐπίγνωσιν an apostle … for the faith … and the knowledge Tit 1:1 (but the mng. ‘in accordance with’ is also prob.).
    ⑤ marker of norm of similarity or homogeneity, according to, in accordance with, in conformity with, according to
    ⓐ to introduce the norm which governs someth.
    α. the norm of the law, etc. (OGI 56, 33; Mitt-Wilck., I/2, 352, 11 κ. τὰ κελευσθέντα [as Just., D. 78, 7]; POxy 37 II, 8) κ. τὸν νόμον (Jos., Ant. 14, 173; 15, 51; Just., D. 10, 1 al.; Ath. 31, 1; κ. τοὺς νόμους Ἀρεοπαγείτης, letter of MAurelius: ZPE 8, ’71, 169, ln. 27) Lk 2:22; J 18:31; 19:7; Hb 7:5. τὰ κ. τ. νόμον what is to be done according to the law Lk 2:39 (cp. EpArist 32). κ. τὸ ὡρισμένον in accordance w. what has been determined 22:22. Cp. 1:9; 2:24, 27, 42; Ac 17:2; 22:3. κ. τὸ εὐαγγέλιόν μου Ro 2:16; 16:25a; 2 Ti 2:8. κ. τὸ εἰρημένον Ro 4:18 (cp. Ath. 28, 1 κ. τὰ προειρημένα). κ. τὰς γραφάς (Just., D. 82, 4; cp. Paus. 6, 21, 10 κ. τὰ ἔπη=according to the epic poems; Just., A I, 32, 14 κ. τὸ λόγιον, D. 67, 1 κ. τὴν προφητείαν ταύτην) 1 Cor 15:3; cp. Js 2:8. κ. τὴν παράδοσιν Mk 7:5 (Tat. 39, 1 κ. τὴν Ἑλλήνων παράδοσιν).—κ. λόγον as one wishes (exx. in Dssm., B 209 [not in BS]; also PEleph 13, 1; 3 Macc 3:14) Ac 18:14 (though 5bβ below is also prob.).—It can also stand simply w. the acc. of the pers. according to whose will, pleasure, or manner someth. occurs κ. θεόν (cp. Socrat., Ep. 14, 5 κ. θεόν; 26, 2; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 4 p. 332, 1 Jac. and Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 84 §352 κ. δαίμονα; Jos., Ant. 4, 143 ὁ κ. τοῦτον[=θεόν] βίος; Just., D. 5, 1 κ. τινας … Πλατωνικούς; Tat. 1, 3 κ. … τὸν κωμικόν) Ro 8:27; 2 Cor 7:9–11; κ. Χριστὸν Ἰ. Ro 15:5. κ. κύριον 2 Cor 11:17. Cp. 1 Pt 1:15. κ. τ. Ἕλληνας in the manner of the Greeks, i.e. polytheists PtK 2, p. 14, 1; 7. κ. Ἰουδαίους ln. 25.
    β. the norm according to which a judgment is rendered, or rewards or punishments are given ἀποδοῦναι τινι κ. τ. πρᾶξιν or ἔργα αὐτοῦ (Ps 61:13; Pr 24:12; Just., A I, 12, 1; 17, 4 al.; κατʼ ἀξίαν τῶν πράξεων) Mt 16:27; Ro 2:6; 2 Ti 4:14; Rv 2:23. μισθὸν λήμψεται κ. τ. ἴδιον κόπον 1 Cor 3:8. κρίνειν κ. τι J 7:24; 8:15; 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Ro 2:2.
    γ. of a standard of any other kind κ. τ. χρόνον ὸ̔ν ἠκρίβωσεν in accordance w. the time which he had ascertained Mt 2:16. κ. τ. πίστιν ὑμῶν acc. to your faith 9:29. κ. τ. δύναμιν acc. to his capability 25:15 (Just., D. 139, 4; Tat. 12, 3; cp. Just., A II, 13, 6 κ. δύναμιν). Cp. Lk 1:38; 2:29; Ro 8:4; 10:2; Eph 4:7. ἀνὴρ κ. τ. καρδίαν μου Ac 13:22 (καρδία 1bε).
    δ. Oft. the norm is at the same time the reason, so that in accordance with and because of are merged: οἱ κ. πρόθεσιν κλητοί Ro 8:28. κατʼ ἐπιταγὴν θεοῦ 16:26; 1 Ti 1:1; Tit 1:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Eph 3:3 (Just., D. 78, 2). οἱ καθʼ ὑπομονὴν ἔργου ἀγαθοῦ Ro 2:7. κατʼ ἐκλογήν 11:5 (Just., D. 49, 1). Cp. κ. τὴν βουλήν Eph 1:11 (Just., A I, 63, 16 al.); 2 Th 2:9; Hb 7:16. κ. τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο; by what shall I know this? (cp. Gen 15:8) Lk 1:18.—Instead of ‘in accordance w.’ κ. can mean simply because of, as a result of, on the basis of (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 219 D.: κ. τοὺς νόμους; Jos., Ant. 1, 259; 278; Just., A I, 54, 1 κατʼ ἐνέργειαν τῶν φαύλων δαιμόνων; Ath. 7, 1 κ. συμπάθειαν τῆς παρὰ τοῦ θεοῦ πνοῆς; 32, 1 κ. χρησμόν). κ. πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any and every reason (αἰτία 1) Mt 19:3. κ. ἀποκάλυψιν Gal 2:2. Cp. Ro 2:5; 1 Cor 12:8 (κ. τ. πνεῦμα = διὰ τοῦ πν.); Eph 1:5; 4:22b; Phil 4:11; 1 Ti 5:21; 2 Ti 1:9; Tit 3:5; κ. ἀνάγκην Phlm 14 (Ar. 1, 2; 4, 2 al.; Just., A I, 30, 1; 61, 10; Ath. 24, 2); IPol 1:3. ὁ κ. τὸ πολὺ αὐτοῦ ἔλεος ἀναγεννήσας ἡμᾶς 1 Pt 1:3.—καθʼ ὅσον (Thu. 4, 18, 4) in so far as, inasmuch as Hb 3:3. καθʼ ὅσον …, κ. τοσοῦτο in so far as …, just so far (Lysias 31, 8; Galen, De Dignosc. Puls. 3, 2, VIII 892 K.) 7:20, 22.
    ⓑ as a periphrasis to express equality, similarity, or example in accordance with, just as, similar(ly) to (TestJob 32:6 τίς γὰρ κ. σε ἐν μέσῳ τῶν τέκνων σου; Tat. 25, 1 κ. … τὸν Πρωτέα like Proteus; schol. on Nicander, Ther. 50: sheep are not burden-bearers κ. τοὺς ὄνους=as donkeys are).
    α. κ. τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε do not do as they do Mt 23:3. κ. Ἰσαάκ just as Isaac Gal 4:28. κ. θεὸν κτισθείς Eph 4:24 (Synes., Prov. 2, 2 p. 118c κ. θεόν=just as a god). Cp. Col 3:10. κ. τὸν τύπον Hb 8:5 (Ex 25:40; Mel., P. 58, 424 [νόμον v.l.]). Cp. 5:6 (Ps 109:4); 8:9 (Jer 38: 32); Js 3:9.—κ. τὰ αὐτά in (just) the same way (OGI 56, 66; PEleph 2, 6; 1 Macc 8:27; 12:2; Just., D. 1, 2; 3, 5; 113, 3) Lk 6:23, 26; 17:30; Dg 3:1. On the other hand, the sing. κ. τὸ αὐτό Ac 14:1 means together (marriage contract PEleph 1, 5 [IV B.C.] εἶναι ἡμᾶς κ. ταὐτό; 1 Km 11:11). καθʼ ὸ̔ν τρόπον just as (2 Macc 6:20; 4 Macc 14:17) Ac 15:11; 27:25. καθʼ ὅσον …, οὕτως (just) as …, so Hb 9:27. κ. πάντα τρόπον in every way (PSI 520, 16 [250 B.C.]; PCairZen 631, 2; 3 Macc 3:24) Ro 3:2. κ. μηδένα τρόπον (PMagd 14, 9 [221 B.C.]; PRein 7, 31; 3 Macc 4:13; 4 Macc 4:24; Just., D. 35, 7; s. Reader, Polemo 262) 2 Th 2:3. Cp. Johannessohn, Kasus, 1910, 82. κατά w. acc. serves in general
    β. to indicate the nature, kind, peculiarity or characteristics of a thing (freq. as a periphrasis for the adv.; e.g. Antiochus of Syracuse [V B.C.]: 555 Fgm. 12 Jac. κ. μῖσος=out of hate, filled with hate) κατʼ ἐξουσίαν with authority or power Mk 1:27. κ. συγκυρίαν by chance Lk 10:31. κ. ἄγνοιαν without knowing Ac 3:17 (s. ἄγνοια 2a). κ. ἄνθρωπον 1 Cor 3:3 al. (s. Straub 15; Aeschyl., Th. 425; ἄνθρωπος 2b). κ. κράτος powerfully, Ac 19:20 (κράτος 1a). κ. λόγον reasonably, rightly (Pla.; Polyb. 1, 62, 4; 5; 5, 110, 10; Jos., Ant. 13, 195; PYale 42, 24 [12 Jan., 229 B.C.]) 18:14 (but s. above 5aα). λέγειν τι κ. συγγνώμην οὐ κατʼ ἐπιταγήν say someth. as a concession, not as a command 1 Cor 7:6; cp. 2 Cor 8:8. κ. τάξιν in (an) order(ly manner) 1 Cor 14:40 (τάξις 2). κατʼ ὀφθαλμοδουλίαν with eye-service Eph 6:6. μηδὲν κατʼ ἐριθείαν μηδὲ κ. κενοδοξίαν Phil 2:3. κ. ζῆλος zealously 3:6a, unless this pass. belongs under 6 below, in its entirety. κ. σάρκα on the physical plane Ro 8:12f; 2 Cor 1:17; also 5:16ab, if here κ. ς. belongs w. οἴδαμεν or ἐγνώκαμεν (as Bachmann, JWeiss, H-D Wendland, Sickenberger take it; s. 7a below). καθʼ ὑπερβολήν (PTebt 42, 5f [c. 114 B.C.] ἠδικημένος καθʼ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπὸ, Ἁρμιύσιος; 4 Macc 3:18) beyond measure, beyond comparison Ro 7:13; 1 Cor 12:31; 2 Cor 4:17. καθʼ ὁμοιότητα (Aristot.; Gen 1:12; Philo, Fug. 51; Tat. 12, 4 κ. τὸ ὅμοιον αὐτῇ) in a similar manner Hb 4:15b. κ. μικρόν in brief B 1:5 (μικρός 1eγ).
    ⑥ denoting relationship to someth., with respect to, in relation to κ. σάρκα w. respect to the flesh, physically of human descent Ro 1:3; 4:1; 9:3, 5 (Ar. 15, 7 κ. σάρκα … κ. ψυχήν; Just., D. 43, 7 ἐν τῷ γένει τῷ κ. σάρκα τοῦ Ἀβραάμ al.). κ. τὸν ἔσω ἄνθρωπον 7:22 (cp. POxy 904, 6 πληγαῖς κατακοπτόμενον κ. τὸ σῶμα). Cp. Ro 1:4; 11:28; Phil 3:5, 6b (for vs. 6a s. 5bβ above); Hb 9:9b. τὰ κ. τινα (Hdt. 7, 148; Diod S 1, 10, 73; Aelian, VH 2, 20; PEleph 13, 3; POxy 120, 14; Tob 10:9; 1 Esdr 9:17; 2 Macc 3:40; 9:3 al.) someone’s case, circumstances Ac 24:22 (cp. PEleph 13, 3 τὰ κ. σε; Just., A I, 61, 13 τὰ κ. τὸν Ἰησοῦν πάντα, D. 102, 2 τὰ κ. αὐτόν; Ath. 24, 4 τὸ κ. τοὺς ἀγγέλους); 25:14; Eph 6:21; Phil 1:12; Col 4:7. κ. πάντα in all respects (since Thu. 4, 81, 3; Sb 4324, 3; 5761, 22; SIG 834, 7; Gen 24:1; Wsd 19:22; 2 Macc 1:17; 3 Macc 5:42; JosAs 1:7; Just., A II, 4, 4, D. 35, 8 al.); Ac 17:22; Col 3:20, 22a; Hb 2:17 (Artem. 1, 13 αὐτῷ ὅμοιον κ. π.); 4:15a.
    ⑦ Somet. the κατά phrase, which would sound cumbersome in the rendering ‘such-and-such’, ‘in line with’, or ‘in accordance with’, is best rendered as an adj., a possessive pron., or with a genitival construction to express the perspective from which something is perceived or to be understood. In translation it thus functions as
    ⓐ an adj. (Synes., Kingdom 4 p. 4d τὰ κατʼ ἀρετὴν ἔργα i.e. the deeds that are commensurate with that which is exceptional = virtuous deeds; PHib 27, 42 ταῖς κ. σελήνην ἡμέραις; 4 Macc 5:18 κ. ἀλήθειαν=ἀληθής; Just., A I, 2, 1 τοὺς κ. ἀλήθειαν εὐσεβεῖς; Tat. 26, 2 τῆς κ. ἀλήθειαν σοφίας) οἱ κ. φύσιν κλάδοι the natural branches Ro 11:21. ἡ κατʼ εὐσέβειαν διδασκαλία 1 Ti 6:3; cp. Tit 1:1b. οἱ κ. σάρκα κύριοι the earthly masters (in wordplay, anticipating the κύριος who is in the heavens, vs. 9) Eph 6:5. Cp. 2 Cor 5:16b, in case (s. 5bβ above) κ. ς. belongs w. Χριστόν (as the majority, incl. Ltzm., take it): a physical Christ, a Christ in the flesh, in his earthly relationships (σάρξ 5). Correspondingly in vs. 16a κ. ς. would be taken w. οὐδένα: no one simply as a physical being.—JMartyn, JKnox Festschr., ’67, 269–87.
    ⓑ a possessive pron., but with limiting force (Demosth. 2, 27 τὰ καθʼ ὑμᾶς ἐλλείμματα [i.e. in contrast to the activities of others: ‘your own’]; Aelian, VH 2, 42 ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ἀρετή; 3, 36; OGI 168, 17 παραγεγονότες εἰς τοὺς καθʼ ὑμᾶς τόπους; SIG 646, 6; 807, 15 al.; UPZ 20, 9 [II B.C.] ἐπὶ τῆς καθʼ ἡμᾶς λειτουργίας; PTebt 24, 64; 2 Macc 4:21; Tat. 42, 1 τίς ὁ θεὸς καὶ τίς ἡ κατʼ αὐτὸν ποίησις; Mel., HE 4, 26, 7 ἡ καθʼ ἡμᾶς φιλοσοφία) τῶν καθʼ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν τινες some of your (own) poets Ac 17:28. ἡ καθʼ ὑμᾶς πίστις Eph 1:15. ὁ καθʼ ὑμᾶς νόμος Ac 18:15. τὸ κατʼ ἐμὲ πρόθυμον my eagerness Ro 1:15.
    ⓒ a gen. w. a noun (Polyb. 3, 113, 1 ἡ κ. τὸν ἥλιον ἀνατολή; 2, 48, 2; 3, 8, 1 al.; Diod S 14, 12 ἡ κ. τὸν τύραννον ὠμότης; Dionys. Hal. 2, 1; SIG 873, 5 τῆς κ. τ. μυστήρια τελετῆς; 569, 22; 783, 20; PTebt 5, 25; PLond III, 1164k, 20 p. 167 [212 A.D.] ὑπὸ τοῦ κ. πατέρα μου ἀνεψιοῦ) τὰ κ. Ἰουδαίους ἔθη the customs of the Judeans Ac 26:3 (Tat. 12, 5 τῇ κ. Βαβυλωνίους προγνωστικῇ; 34, 2 ἡ κ. τὸν Ἀριστόδημον πλαστική). Cp. 27:2. ἡ κ. πίστιν δικαιοσύνη the righteousness of faith Hb 11:7. ἡ κατʼ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις purpose of election Ro 9:11.—Here also belong the titles of the gospels εὐαγγέλιον κατὰ Ματθαῖον etc., where κατά is likew. periphrasis for a gen. (cp. JLydus, De Mag. 3, 46 p. 136, 10 Wünsch τῆς κ. Λουκανὸν συγγραφῆς; Herodian 2, 9, 4 of an autobiography ἐν τῷ καθʼ αὑτὸν βίῳ; Jos., C. Ap. 1, 18 τ. καθʼ αὐτὸν ἱστορίαν; 2 Macc 2:13. Cp. B-D-F §163; 224, 2; Zahn, Einleitung §49; BBacon, Why ‘According to Mt’? Exp., 8th ser., 16, 1920, 289–310).—On the periphrasis of the gen. by κατά s. Rudberg (ἀνά beg.) w. many exx. fr. Pla. on. But it occurs as early as Thu. 6, 16, 5 ἐν τῷ κατʼ αὐτοὺς βίῳ.—M-M. DELG. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κατά

  • 4 μέγας

    μέγας, μεγάλη, μέγα (Hom.+) comp. μείζων and beside it, because of the gradual disappearance of feeling for its comp. sense, μειζότερος 3J 4 (APF 3, 1906, 173; POxy 131, 25; BGU 368, 9; ApcSed 1:5 [cp. J 15:13]; s. B-D-F §61, 2; W-S. §11, 4; Mlt-H. 166; Gignac II 158). Superl. μέγιστος (2 Pt 1:4).
    ① pert. to exceeding a standard involving related objects, large, great
    ⓐ of any extension in space in all directions λίθος Mt 27:60; Mk 16:4. δένδρον Lk 13:19 v.l. (TestAbr B 3 p. 107, 6 [Stone p. 62]). κλάδοι Mk 4:32. Buildings 13:2. Fish J 21:11. A mountain (Tyrtaeus [VII B.C.], Fgm. 4, 8 D.2; Ps.-Aristot., Mirabilia 138; Theopomp. [IV B.C.]: 115 Fgm. 78 Jac.) Rv 8:8. A star vs. 10. A furnace 9:2 (ParJer 6:23). A dragon (Esth 1:1e; Bel 23 Theod.) 12:3, 9. ἀετός (Ezk 17:3; ParJer 7:18 [RHarris; om. Kraft-Purintun]) vs. 14. μάχαιρα a long sword 6:4. ἅλυσις a long chain 20:1. πέλαγος AcPl Ha 7, 23 (first hand).
    ⓑ with suggestion of spaciousness ἀνάγαιον a spacious room upstairs Mk 14:15; Lk 22:12. θύρα a wide door 1 Cor 16:9. A winepress Rv 14:19 (ληνός μ. ‘trough’ JosAs 2:20); χάσμα a broad chasm (2 Km 18:17) Lk 16:26. οἰκία (Jer 52:13) 2 Ti 2:20.
    ⓒ with words that include the idea of number ἀγέλη μ. a large herd Mk 5:11. δεῖπνον a great banquet, w. many invited guests (Da 5:1 Theod.; JosAs 3:6) Lk 14:16. Also δοχὴ μ. (Gen 21:8) Lk 5:29; GJs 6:2.
    ⓓ of age (Jos., Ant. 12, 207 μικρὸς ἢ μέγας=‘young or old’); to include all concerned μικροὶ καὶ μεγάλοι small and great (PGM 15, 18) Rv 11:18; 13:16; 19:5, 18; 20:12. μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ Ac 26:22. ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου (Gen 19:11; 4 Km 23:2; 2 Ch 34:30; POxy 1350) 8:10; Hb 8:11 (Jer 38:34). μέγας γενόμενος when he was grown up 11:24 (Ex 2:11). ὁ μείζων the older (O. Wilck II, 144, 3 [128 A.D.]; 213, 3; 1199, 2; LXX; cp. Polyb. 18, 18, 9 Σκιπίων ὁ μέγας; 32, 12, 1) Ro 9:12; 13:2 (both Gen 25:23).
    ② pert. to being above average in quantity, great πορισμός a great means of gain 1 Ti 6:6. μισθαποδοσία rich reward Hb 10:35.
    ③ pert. to being above standard in intensity, great δύναμις Ac 4:33; 19:8 D. Esp. of sound: loud φωνή Mk 15:37; Lk 17:15; Rv 1:10; φωνῇ μεγάλῃ (LXX; TestAbr A 5 p. 82, 20f [Stone p. 12]; ParJer 2:2; ApcMos 5:21) Mt 27:46, 50; Mk 1:26; 5:7; 15:34; Lk 4:33; 8:28; 19:37; 23:23 (Φωναῖς μεγάλαις), 46; J 11:43; Ac 7:57, 60; 8:7; Rv 5:12; 6:10 al.; μεγ. φωνῇ (ParJer 5:32); Ac 14:10; 16:28; μεγ. τῇ φωνῇ (ParJer 9:8; Jos., Bell. 6, 188) 14:10 v.l.; 26:24; ἐν φωνῇ μ. Rv 5:2. μετὰ σάλπιγγος μεγάλης with a loud trumpet call Mt 24:31. κραυγή (Ex 11:6; 12:30) Lk 1:42; Ac 23:9; cp. μεῖζον κράζειν cry out all the more Mt 20:31. κοπετός (Gen 50:10) Ac 8:2.—Of natural phenomena: ἄνεμος μ. a strong wind J 6:18; Rv 6:13. λαῖλαψ μ. (Jer 32:32) Mk 4:37. βροντή (Sir 40:13) Rv 14:2. χάλαζα Rv 11:19; 16:21a. χάλαζα λίαν μ. σφόδρα AcPl Ha 5, 7. σεισμὸς μ. (Jer 10:22; Ezk 3:12; 38:19; Jos., Ant. 9, 225) Mt 8:24; 28:2; Lk 21:11a; Ac 16:26. γαλήνη μ. a deep calm Mt 8:26; Mk 4:39; φῶς μ. a bright light (JosAs 6:3; ParJer 9:18 [16]; Plut., Mor. 567f: a divine voice sounds forth from this light; Petosiris, Fgm. 7, ln. 39 τὸ ἱερὸν ἄστρον μέγα ποιοῦν φῶς) Mt 4:16a; GJs 19:2 (Is 9:1). καῦμα μ. intense heat Rv 16:9 (JosAs 3:3).—Of surprising or unpleasant events or phenomena of the most diverse kinds (ἀπώλεια Dt 7:23; θάνατος Ex 9:3; Jer 21:6; κακόν Philo, Agr. 47) σημεῖα (Dt 6:22; 29:2) Mt 24:24; Lk 21:11b; Ac 6:8. δυνάμεις 8:13. ἔργα μ. mighty deeds (cp. Judg 2:7) Rv 15:3. μείζω τούτων greater things than these J 1:50 (μείζονα v.l.); cp. 5:20; 14:12. διωγμὸς μ. a severe persecution Ac 8:1; θλῖψις μ. (a time of) great suffering (1 Macc 9:27) Mt 24:21; Ac 7:11; Rv 2:22; 7:14. πειρασμός AcPl Ha 8, 22. πληγή (Judg 15:8; 1 Km 4:10, 17 al.; TestReub 1:7; TestSim 8:4; Philo, Sacr. Abel. 134) 16:21b. θόρυβος GJs 21:1; AcPl Ha 1, 28f (restored, s. AcPlTh [Aa I 258, 6]) λιμὸς μ. (4 Km 6:25; 1 Macc 9:24) Lk 4:25; Ac 11:28; ἀνάγκη μ. Lk 21:23; πυρετὸς μ. a high fever (s. πυρετός) 4:38.—Of emotions: χαρά great joy (Jon 4:6; JosAs 3:4; 4:2 al.; Jos., Ant. 12, 91) Mt 2:10; 28:8; Lk 2:10; 24:52. φόβος great fear (X., Cyr. 4, 2, 10; Menand., Fgm. 388 Kö.; Jon 1:10, 16; 1 Macc 10:8; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 18 [Stone p. 82]; JosAs 6:1; GrBar 7:5) Mk 4:41; Lk 2:9; 8:37; Ac 5:5, 11; AcPl Ha 3, 33. θυμὸς μ. fierce anger (1 Macc 7:35) Rv 12:12. μείζων ἀγάπη greater love J 15:13. λύπη profound (Jon 4:1; 1 Macc 6:4, 9, 13; TestJob 7:8) Ro 9:2. σκυθρωπία AcPl Ha 7, 36. πίστις firm Mt 15:28. ἔκστασις (cp. Gen 27:33; ParJer 5:8, 12) Mk 5:42.
    ④ pert. to being relatively superior in importance, great
    ⓐ of rational entities: of God and other deities θεός (SIG 985, 34 θεοὶ μεγάλοι [LBlock, Megaloi Theoi: Roscher II 2523–28, 2536–40; SCole, Theoi Megaloi, The Cult of the Great Gods at Samothrace ’84]; 1237, 5 ὀργὴ μεγάλη τ. μεγάλου Διός; OGI 50, 7; 168, 6; 716, 1; PStras 81, 14 [115 B.C.] Ἴσιδος μεγάλης μητρὸς θεῶν; POxy 886, 1; PTebt 409, 11; 22 ὁ θεὸς μ. Σάραπις, al.; PGM 4, 155; 482; 778 and oft.; 3052 μέγ. θεὸς Σαβαώθ; 5, 474; Dt 10:17 al. in LXX; En 103:4; 104:1; Philo, Cher. 29 al.; Jos., Ant. 8, 319; SibOr 3, 19; 71 al.—Thieme 36f) Tit 2:13 (Christ is meant). Ἄρτεμις (q.v.) Ac 19:27f, 34f (cp. Ael. Aristid. 48, 21 K.=24 p. 471 D. the outcry: μέγας ὁ Ἀσκληπιός); s. New Docs 1, 106 on this epithet in ref. to deities. Simon the magician is called ἡ δύναμις τ. θεοῦ ἡ καλουμένη μεγάλη Ac 8:10b (s. δύναμις 5). The angel Michael Hs 8, 3, 3; cp. 8, 4, 1.—Of people who stand in relation to the Divinity or are otherw. in high position: ἀρχιερεύς (s. ἀρχιερεύς 2a and ἱερεύς aβ.—ἀρχ. μέγ. is also the appellation of the priest-prince of Olba [s. PECS 641f] in Cilicia: MAMA III ’31 p. 67, ins 63; 64 [I B.C.]) Hb 4:14. προφήτης (Sir 48:22) Lk 7:16. ποιμήν Hb 13:20. Gener. of rulers: οἱ μεγάλοι the great ones, those in high position Mt 20:25; Mk 10:42. Of people prominent for any reason Mt 5:19; 20:26; Mk 10:43; Lk 1:15, 32; Ac 5:36 D; 8:9 (MSmith, HWolfson Festschr., ’65, 741: μ. here and Lk 1:32 may imply a messianic claim).—μέγας in the superl. sense (2 Km 7:9.—The positive also stands for the superl., e.g. Sallust. 4 p. 6, 14, where Paris calls Aphrodite καλή=the most beautiful. Diod S 17, 70, 1 πολεμία τῶν πόλεων=the most hostile [or especially hostile] among the cities) Lk 9:48 (opp. ὁ μικρότερος).—Comp. μείζων greater of God (Ael. Aristid. 27, 3 K.=16 p. 382 D.; PGM 13, 689 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε, τὸν πάντων μείζονα) J 14:28; Hb 6:13; 1J 3:20; 4:4. More prominent or outstanding because of certain advantages Mt 11:11; Lk 7:28; 22:26f; J 4:12; 8:53; 13:16ab; 1 Cor 14:5. More closely defined: ἰσχύϊ καὶ δυνάμει μείζων greater in power and might 2 Pt 2:11. μεῖζον τοῦ ἱεροῦ someth. greater than the temple Mt 12:6. μείζων with superl. mng. (Ps.-Apollod., Epit. 7, 8 Wagner: Ὀδυσσεὺς τρεῖς κριοὺς ὁμοῦ συνδέων … καὶ αὐτὸς τῷ μείζονι ὑποδύς; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 87 §366 ἐν παρασκευῇ μείζονι= in the greatest preparation; Vett. Val. 62, 24; TestJob 3:1 ἐν μείζονι φωτί) Mt 18:1, 4; 23:11; Mk 9:34; Lk 9:46; 22:24, 26.
    ⓑ of things: great, sublime, important μυστήριον (GrBar 1:6; 2:6; ApcMos 34; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 100 al.; Just., A I, 27, 4) Eph 5:32; 1 Ti 3:16. Of the sabbath day that begins a festival period J 19:31; MPol 8:1b. Esp. of the day of the divine judgment (LXX; En 22:4; ApcEsdr 3:3 p. 27, 7 Tdf.; Just., D. 49, 2 al.; cp. TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 11 [Stone p. 32]) Ac 2:20 (Jo 3:4); Jd 6; Rv 6:17; 16:14. Of Paul’s superb instructional ability μ̣ε̣γάλῃ καθ̣[ηγήσει] AcPl Ha 6, 30f.—μέγας in the superl. sense (Plut., Mor. 35a w. πρῶτος; Himerius, Or. 14 [Ecl. 15], 3 μέγας=greatest, really great; B-D-F §245, 2; s. Rob. 669) ἐντολή Mt 22:36, 38. ἡμέρα ἡ μ. τῆς ἑορτῆς the great day of the festival J 7:37 (cp. Lucian, Pseudolog. 8 ἡ μεγάλη νουμηνία [at the beginning of the year]); Mel., P. 79, 579; 92, 694 ἐν τῇ μ. ἐορτῇ; GJs 1:2; 2:2 (s. deStrycker on 1:2). Of Mary’s day of parturition ὡς μεγάλη ἡ σήμερον ἡμέρα what a great day this is GJs 19:2. μείζων as comp. (Chion, Ep. 16, 8 philosophy as νόμος μείζων=higher law; Sir 10:24) J 5:36; 1J 5:9. μ. ἁμαρτία J 19:11 (cp. schol. on Pla. 189d ἁμαρτήματα μεγάλα; Ex 32:30f). τὰ χαρίσματα τὰ μείζονα the more important spiritual gifts (in the sense Paul gave the word) 1 Cor 12:31. As a superl. (Epict. 3, 24, 93; Stephan. Byz. s.v. Ὕβλαι: the largest of three cities is ἡ μείζων [followed by ἡ ἐλάττων, and finally ἡ μικρά=the smallest]. The comparative also performs the function of the superlative, e.g. Diod S 20, 22, 2, where πρεσβύτερος is the oldest of 3 men) Mt 13:32; 1 Cor 13:13 (by means of the superl. μ. Paul singles out from the triad the one quality that interests him most in this connection, just as Ael. Aristid. 45, 16 K. by means of αὐτός at the end of the θεοί singles out Sarapis, the only one that affects him).—The superl. μέγιστος, at times used by contemporary authors, occurs only once in the NT, where it is used in the elative sense very great, extraordinary (Diod S 2, 32, 1) ἐπαγγέλματα 2 Pt 1:4.—On the adv. usage Ac 26:29 s. ὀλίγος 2bβ.—Neut. pl. μεγάλα ποιεῖν τινι do great things for someone Lk 1:49 (cp. Dt 10:21). λαλεῖν μεγάλα καὶ βλασφημίας utter proud words and blasphemies Rv 13:5 (Da 7:8; cp. En 101:3). ἐποίει μεγ̣[ά]λα καὶ [θα]υ̣[μά]σ̣ι̣α̣ (Just., A I, 62, 4) (Christ) proceeded to perform great and marvelous deeds AcPl Ha 8, 33/BMM verso 6.
    ⑤ pert. to being unusual, surprising, neut. μέγα εἰ … θερίσομεν; is it an extraordinary thing (i.e. are we expecting too much = our colloquial ‘is it a big deal’) if we wish to reap? 1 Cor 9:11. οὐ μέγα οὖν, εἰ it is not surprising, then, if 2 Cor 11:15 (on this constr. cp. Pla., Menex. 235d; Plut., Mor. 215f; Gen 45:28; s. AFridrichsen, ConNeot 2, ’36, 46).—B. 878f; 1309. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μέγας

  • 5 ἦμαρ

    Grammatical information: n.
    Meaning: `day' (Il.; s. below).
    Other forms: Cypr. ἀματι-ἀματι `day after day' (as in Myc. wetei-wetei).
    Dialectal forms: Myc. amor. amorama \/āmōramar\/ `day after day'? Diwijamero perhaps \/dwi(y)āmeron\/ period of two days', Lamberterie, BSL 94 (1999) 264. Dor. Arc. ἆμαρ, - ατος;
    Compounds: As 2. member e. g. in ἐνν-, ἑξ-, αὑτ-, παν-, προ-ῆμαρ `nine days long' etc. (Hom.); on the type of comp. Leumann Hom. Wörter 100f. (against Wackernagel Glotta 2, 1ff.). As 1. member e. g. ἡμερό-κοιτος `taking his layer by day, sleaping by day' (Hes.); as 2. member e. g. in ἐφ-ήμερος (Pi., IA; - έριος Od.) `living only a day, transient, dayly' with ἐφημερίς, - ία, - εύω, - ευτήριον.
    Derivatives: ἠμάτιος `daily, at day' (Hom., Hes.). - Lengthened form ἡμέρα, Ion. - ρη, Dor. etc. ἀμέρα, Locr. ἀμάρα `id.' (Il.); on the meaning v. Windekens Philol. Stud. 11-12, 25ff. On τήμερον, μεσημβρία s. v. Derivv. ἡμέριος ( ἁμ-) `living only one day, dayly' (trag.), ἡμερινός `belonging to the day' (IA.; Chantraine Formation 201), ἡμερήσιος (- ίσιος?; s. Debrunner Glotta 13, 169) `lasting one day, belonging to the day, dayly' (IA.; Chantraine 42), ἡμεραῖος `id.' (pap.), ἡμερούσιος adv. `dayly' (pap. IVp; after ἐπιούσιος; Debrunner l. c.). Denomin. verb ἡμερεύω `spend the day', also with prefix, δι-, παν- (IA.); from there ἡμέρευσις `spending the day' (Aq.).
    Origin: IE [Indo-European] [35] * Heh₂mer `day'
    Etymology: A cognate to ἦμαρ, which was Ionisized from Aeol. ἆμαρ and from Homer in Dorianising poetry, also taken over in ceremonial prosaic formulae (Arc. ἄματα πάντα), is Arm. awr `day' (IE * āmōr; cf. τέκμαρ: - μωρ); further not in any language group. Lengthened ἡμέρα (Locr. ἀμάρ-α), on which see Chantraine Formation 228, may have its spiritus from ἑσπέρα (Schwyzer 305, Wackernagel Unt. 45 A. 1). On ἦμαρ and ἡμέρη in Homer Debrunner Mus. Helv. 3, 40ff.; on ἦμαρ used as plural Leumann Hom. Wörter 100, who sees in it against Wackernagel, Benveniste a. o. as an innovation. S. μεσημβρία
    Page in Frisk: 1,634-635

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > ἦμαρ

  • 6 ὥρα

    ὥρα or [full] ὤρα (B), only in [dialect] Ion. form [full] ὥρη, or [full] ὤρη, some part of a sacrificial victim,
    A

    λάψεται γλῶσσαν, ὀσφῦν δασέαν, ὤρην SIG1037.2

     (Milet., iv/iii B.C.); τοὺς Ἴωνας λέγειν φασὶ τὴν κωλῆν ὥρην καὶ ὡραίαν Sch.HQ Od.12.89: but distd. fr. κωλῆ, λάψεται.. κωλῆν ἀντὶ τῆς ὤρης SIGl.c.5; cf. ἄωρος(B). (Perh. cogn. with Lat. sūra.)
    ------------------------------------
    ὥρα (C), [dialect] Ion. [full] ὥρη, ἡ: [dialect] Ep. gen. pl. ὡράων, [dialect] Ion. ὡρέων: loc. pl. ὥρασι, q. v.
    A any period, fixed by natural laws and revolutions, whether of the year, month, or day (the sense 'day' is implied in the compd. ἑπτάωρος, q. v.),

    νυκτός τε ὥραν καὶ μηνὸς καὶ ἐνιαυτοῦ X.Mem. 4.7.4

    , cf. E.Alc. 449(lyr.), Pl.R. 527d;

    τοῦ γνώμονος ἡ σκιὰ ἐπιοῦσα ἐπὶ τὰς γραμμὰς σημαίνει τὰς ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ καὶ τῆς ἡμέρας IG12(8).240

     ([place name] Samothrace): but specially,
    I in Hom., part of the year, season; mostly in pl., the seasons,

    ὅτε τέτρατον ἦλθεν ἔτος καὶ ἐπήλυθον ὧραι Od.2.107

    , 19.152;

    ἀλλ' ὅτε δὴ μῆνές τε καὶ ἡμέραι ἐξετελεῦντο, ἂψ περιτελλομένου ἔτεος, καὶ ἐπήλυθον ὧραι 11.295

    , 14.294;

    ἀλλ' ὅτε δή ῥ' ἐνιαυτὸς ἔην, περὶ δ' ἔτραπον ὧραι 10.469

    , cf. Hes. Th. 58;

    Διὸς ὧραι Od.24.344

    , cf. Pi.O.4.2;

    ὁ κύκλος τῶν ὡρέων ἐς τὠυτὸ περιιών Hdt.2.4

    , cf. 1.32;

    δυώδεκα μέρεα δασαμένους τῶν ὡρέων ἐς [τὸν ἐνιαυτόν] Id.2.4

    ; οὐ μεταλλάσσουσι αἱ ὧραι ib.77;

    περιτελλομέναις ὥραις S.OT 156

     (lyr.); πάσαις ὥραις at all seasons, Id.Fr.592.6 (lyr.), Ar.Av. 696 (anap.);

    ὧραι ἐτῶν καὶ ἐνιαυτῶν Pl.Lg. 906c

    , cf. Smp. 188a, etc.;

    τῆς.. ὥρας τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ταύτης οὔσης, ἐν ᾗ ἀσθενοῦσιν ἄνθρωποι μάλιστα Th.7.47

    ; χαλεπὴ ὥ. a bad season, Pl.Prt. 344d;

    ἀ δ' ὤρα χαλέπα Alc.39

    ; ἡ ὥ. αὕτη this season, X.Cyn.7.1, cf. 5.6; κατὰ τὰς ὥρας according to the seasons, Arist.GA 786a31;

    οἱ περὶ τὴν ὥραν χρόνοι Id.Pol. 1335a37

    .—Hom. and Hes. distinguish three seasons, and express each by the sg. ὥρη, with a word added to specify each:
    a spring,

    ἔαρος.. ὥρη Il.6.148

    ;

    ὥρη εἰαρινή 2.471

    , 16.643, Od.18.367, etc.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., ἦρος ὥρα or ὧραι, Ar.Nu. 1008 (anap.), E.Cyc. 508 (lyr.);

    ὥρα νέα Ar.Eq. 419

    ;

    νεᾶνις E.Ph. 786

     (lyr.); v. infr. 2.
    b summer,

    θέρεος ὥρη Hes.Op. 584

    , 664;

    ὥρα θερινή X.Cyn.9.20

    , Pl.Epin. 987a, etc.
    c winter,

    χείματος ὥρη Hes.Op. 450

    ;

    ὥρῃ χειμερίῃ Od.5.485

    , Hes.Op. 494; χειμῶνος ὥρᾳ in winter, And.1.137;

    χιονοβόλος Plu.2.182e

    .—A. also names three seasons, Pr. 454sq.; an Egyptian division of the year, acc. to D.S.1.26.—A fourth first appears in Alcm.76, θέρος καὶ χεῖμα κὠπώραν τρίταν καὶ τέτρατον τὸ ϝῆρ; and in Hp.Vict.3.68,

    χειμών, ἦρ, θέρος, φθινόπωρον; ὥρας φαίνομεν ἡμεῖς ἦρος χειμῶνος ὀπώρας Ar.Av. 709

     (anap.); τετράμορφοι ὧραι E(?).Fr. 943 (hex.): later, seven seasons are named,

    ἔαρ, θέρος, ὀπώρα, φθινόπωρον, σπορητός, χειμών, φυταλιά Gal.17(1).17

    .
    b in historians, the campaigning season,

    τὸν τῆς ὥρας εἰς τὸν περίπλουν χρόνον X.HG6.2.13

    ; esp. in the phrase ὥρα ἔτους, Th.2.52, 6.70, Pl.Phdr. 229a, Lg. 952e, D.50.23, Thphr.CP3.23.2; εἰς ἔτους ὥραν next season, Plu.Per.10.
    3 the year generally,

    τῆς ὥρης μέσον θέρος Hdt.8.12

    ; ἐν τῇ πέρυσιν ὥρᾳ last year, D.56.3; εἰς ὥρας next year, Philem.116, Pl.Ep. 346c, LXX Ge.18.10, AP11.17 (Nicarch.), cf. Plu.Ages.22; also

    εἰς ἄλλας ὥρας

     hereafter,

    E.IA 122

     (lyr.);

    ἐς τὰς ὥρας τὰς ἑτέρας Ar.Nu. 562

     (lyr.);

    ἐκ τῶν ὡρῶν εἰς τὰς ὥρας Id.Th. 950

     (anap.); κἠς ὥρας κἤπειτα next year and for ever, Theoc.15.74; also

    ὥραις ἐξ ὡρᾶν Isyll.25

    ; cf. ὥρασιν.
    4 in pl., of the climate of a country, as determined by its seasons, Hdt.1.142, cf. 149, 4.199 (here perh. three harvest seasons);

    τὰς ὥ. κάλλιστα κεκρημένας Id.3.106

    ; cf. Pl.Criti. 111e, Phd. 111b; climatic conditions, Hdt.2.26.
    II time of day,

    νυκτὸς ἐν ὥρῃ h.Merc.67

    , 155, 400; αἱ ὧ. τῆς ἡμέρας the times of day, i.e. morning, noon, evening, and night, X.Mem.4.3.4; δι' ὥραν ἡμέρας by the time of day (fixed for meetings), D.Prooem.49, etc.;

    πᾶσαν ὥ. τῆς ἡμέρας Arist.Mete. 371b31

    ;

    μεσονυκτίοις ποθ' ὥραις Anacreont.31.1

    : without ἡμέρας or

    νυκτός, ἑκάστης ἡμέρας μέχρι τρίτου μέρους ὥρας Pl. Lg. 784a

    ;

    τῆς ὥρας μικρὸν πρὸ δύντος ἡλίου X.HG7.2.22

    ; ψευσθεὶς τῆς ὥ. having mistaken the hour, And.1.38; ἐποίησαν ἔξω μέσων νυκτῶν τὴν ὥραν, i.e. they prolonged the day beyond midnight, D.54.26;

    τῆς ὥρας ἐγίγνετ' ὀψέ Id.21.84

    ;

    ὀψίτερον τῆς ὥ. PTeb. 793 xi 12

     (ii B. C.);

    πολλῆς ὥρας

     it being late,

    Plb.5.8.3

    ;

    ἤδη ὥρα πολλή Ev.Marc.6.35

    ; ἄχρι πολλῆς ὥρας till late in the day, D.H.2.54.
    b duration, interval or lapse of time,

    μετὰ ἱκανὴν ὥραν τοῦ κατενεχθῆναι τὸν πέλεκυν ἐξακούεται ἡ τῆς πληγῆς φωνή S.E.M.5.69

    ; length of time, term, Ἄρτεμις ἐννέ' ἐτῶν δεκάδας βίον Ἀρτεμιδώρῳ ἔκχρησεν, τρεῖς δ' ὥραι(date.)

    ἔτι προσέθηκε Προνοίη IG12(3).1350.3

     (Thera, ii B. C.); ἐπὶ πολλὴν ὥ. for a long time, J.AJ8.4.4.
    b in ordinary life the day from sunrise to sunset was divided into twelve equal parts called ὧραι ( ὧραι καιρικαί when it was necessary to distinguish them from the ὧραι ἰσημεριναί, v. καιρικός 2 c),

    ἡμέρα ἡ.. δωδεκάωρος, τουτέστιν ἡ ἀπὸ ἀνατολῆς μέχρι δύσεως S.E.M.10.182

    ;

    οὐχὶ δώδεκά εἰσιν ὧραι τῆς ἡμέρας; Ev.Jo.11.9

    ;

    ὡράων ἀμφὶ δυωδεκάδι AP9.782

     (Paul.Sil.); the time of day was commonly given without the Art.,

    ὥρᾳ ᾱ PHamb.1.96.3

     (ii A. D.),

    τρίτης ὥρας Plu.Rom.12

    ; ὀγδόης, ἐνάτης, δεκάτης ὥ., Id.Alex.60, Aem.22, Ant.68, etc.; but we have περὶ τὴν τρίτην ὥραν, περὶ τὴν ἑνδεκάτην, Ev.Matt.20.3,6, beside περὶ ἕκτην καὶ ἐννάτην ὥ. ib.5;

    χθὲς ὥραν ἑβδόμην Ev.Jo.4.52

    , cf. IG5(1).1390.109 (Andania, i B. C.), etc.; ἐρωτᾷ σε Χαιρήμων δειπνῆσαι.. αὔριον, ἥτις ἐστὶν ιε, ἀπὸ ὥρας θ ¯ - to-morrow the 15th at 9 o'clock, POxy.110 (ii A. D.): prov., δωδεκάτης ὥ., as we say 'at the eleventh hour', Plu.Crass.17.
    c

    τὰ δυώδεκα μέρεα τῆς ἡμέρης παρὰ Βαβυλωνίων ἔμαθον οἱ Ἕλληνες Hdt. 2.109

    ; here ἡμέρη means the νυχθήμερον, and the μέρεα were each = 2 ὧραι ἰσημεριναί; these double hours (Assyr. kaš-bu) are called ὧραι by Eudox.,

    ἥμισυ ζῳδίου.., ὅ ἐστιν ὥρας ἥμισυ Ars14.11

    , cf. 16.2; cf.

    δωδεκάωρος 11

    .
    III Astrol., degree of the zodiac rising at the nativity (cf.

    ὡρονόμος 11

    ,

    ὡροσκόπος 11

    ), ὥ. μεροποσπόρος, τεκνοσπόρος, Man.4.577, 597; ἐξ ὥρης ἐσορῶν Ζεὺς Ἑρμείην Jupiter in the ascendant in aspect with Mercury, Id.3.186, cf. 32, al.
    B the fitting time or season for a thing (mostly without Art., even in [dialect] Att.), freq. in Hom. (v. infr.);

    ὥρα συνάπτει Pi.P.4.247

    ;

    ὧραι ἐπειγόμεναι Id.N.4.34

    ;

    ὅταν ὥ. ἥκῃ X.Mem.2.1.2

    ; but with Art.,

    τῆς ὥ. ἐνθυμεῖσθαι Id.Cyn.8.6

    : freq. in later writers,

    τῆς ὥρας ἐπιγενομένης Plb.2.34.3

    , etc.
    2 c. gen. rei, ὥρη κοίτοιο, μύθων, ὕπνου, the time for bed, tale-telling, or sleep, Od.3.334, 11.379, cf. Hdt.1.10;

    ὥρη δόρποιο Od.14.407

    ;

    περὶ ἀρίστου ὥραν Th.7.81

    , X.HG1.1.13;

    πολυηράτου ἐς γάμου ὥρην Od.15.126

    ;

    ἐς γάμου ὥρην ἀπικέσθαι Hdt. 6.61

    ;

    γάμων ἔχειν ὥραν D.H.5.32

    ; so εἰς ἀνδρὸς ὥραν ἥκουσα time for a husband, Pl.Criti. 113d; ὥρη ἀρότου, ἀμήτου, Hes.Op. 460, 575;

    μέχρι ἀρότου ὥρης IG7.235.3

     (Oropus, iv B. C.);

    καρπῶν ὧραι Ar.Ra. 1034

     (anap.);

    ἡ ὥρα τῆς ὀχείας Arist.HA 509b20

    ; τοῦ φωλεύειν ib. 579a26, etc.; also ὥραν εἶχον παιδεύεσθαι I was of age to.. Is.9.28.
    3 ὥρα [ἐστίν] c. inf., it is time to do a thing,

    ἀλλὰ καὶ ὥρη εὕδειν Od.11.330

    , cf. 373; so also in Trag. and [dialect] Att., E.Ph. 1584, Heracl. 288 (anap.), Ar.Ec.30, Pl.Prt. 361e, 362a; so

    δοκεῖ οὐχ ὥρα εἶναι καθεύδειν X.An.1.3.11

    , cf. HG7.2.13 (dub. l.): c. acc. et inf.,

    ὥρα δ' ἐμπόρους καθιέναι ἄγκυραν A.Ch. 661

    , cf. S.OT 466 (lyr.): c. dat. et inf., X.Cyr.4.5.1, Pl.Tht. 145b: in these phrases the inf. [tense] pres. is almost universal; the [tense] aor., however, occurs in Od.21.428, S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), Ar.Ach. 393 (where also ἐστί is added to ὥρα, as in Philyll.3, ἀφαιρεῖν ὥρα 'στὶν ἤδη τὰς τραπέζας); and the [tense] pf. in

    ὥρα πεπαῦσθαι Plu.2.728d

    : sts. the inf. must be supplied,

    οὐδέ τί σε χρή, πρὶν ὥρη, καταλέχθαι Od.15.394

    , cf. E.El. 112 (lyr.), Ar.Ec. 877; ὥρα κἠς οἶκον (i. e. ἰέναι εἰς οἶκον) Theoc.15.147.
    4 in various adverb. usages,

    τὴν ὥρην

     at the right time,

    Hdt.2.2

    , 8.19, X.Oec.20.16: but τὴν ὥ. at that hour, Hes.Sc. 401; ταύτην τὴν ὥραν at this season, X.Cyn.9.1;

    [ἡ ἶρις] πᾶσαν ὥραν γίγνεται τῆς ἡμέρας Arist.Mete. 371b31

    ;

    δείελον ὥρην παύομαι ἀμήτοιο A.R. 3.417

    ; ὥραν οὐδενὸς κοινὴν θεῶν at an hour.., A.Eu. 109, cf. E.Ba. 724, Aeschin.1.9; αὐτῆς ὥρας immediately, PMich. in Class.Phil.22.255(iii A. D.); ἐν ὥρῃ in due season, in good time, Od.17.176, Hdt. 1.31, cf. Pi.O.6.28, Ar.V. 242, etc.; also αἰεὶ εἰς ὥρας in successive seasons, Od.9.135; ἐς τὰς ὥρας for all time, Ar.Ra. 382 (lyr. cf. supr. A. 1.3) (hence in an acclamation [ε] ἰς ὥρας πᾶσι τοῖς τὴν πόλιν φιλοῦσιν hurrah for.., POxy.41.29 (iii/iv A. D.));

    οἱ ὧδε χέζοντες εἰς ὥ. μὴ ἔλθοιεν Milet.2(3)

     No.406, cf.

    ὥρασι; καθ' ὥραν Theoc.18.12

    , Plb.1.45.4, cf. 3.93.6, etc.; opp.

    παρ' ὥρην AP7.534

     (Alex.Aet. or Autom.), cf. Plu.2.784b, etc.:—

    πρὸ τῆς ὥρας X.Oec.20.16

    ;

    πρὸ ὥρας Luc.Luct.13

    ;

    πρὸ ὥρας τελευτῆσαι IG42(1).84.26

     (Epid., i A. D.);

    πρὶν ὥρας Pi.P.4.43

     (cf.

    πρίν A. 11.4

    ).
    II metaph., the spring-time of life, the bloom of youth, Mimn.3.1;

    ὥραν ἐχούσας A.Supp. 997

    , cf. Th.13, 535;

    παῖδας πρὸς τέρμασιν ὥρας Ar.Av. 705

     (anap.);

    πάντες οἱ ἐν ὥρᾳ Pl.R. 474d

    ; οὐκ ἐνὥ., = πρεσβύτερος, Id.Phdr. 240d;

    ἐὰν ἐπὶ ὥρᾳ ᾖ Id.R. 474e

    ;

    ἕως ἂν ἐν ὥρᾳ ὦσι Id.Men. 76b

    ; παυσαμένου τῆς ὥ. prob. in Id.Phdr. 234a;

    ἀνθεῖν ἐν ὥ. Id.R. 475a

    ;

    τὴν ὥ. διαφυλάξαι ἄβατον τοῖς πονηροῖς Isoc.10.58

    ; λήγειν ὥρας, opp. ἀνθεῖν, Pl.Alc.1.131e;

    ἑς ἐπιγινόμενόν τι τέλος, οἷον τοῖς ἀκμαίοις ἡ ὥρα Arist.EN 1174b33

    , cf. 1157a8.
    2 freq. involving an idea of beauty,

    φεῦ φεῦ τῆς ὥρας τοῦ κάλλους Ar.Av. 1724

    (lyr.);

    ὥρᾳ.. ἡλικίας λαμπρός Th.6.54

    ;

    κάλλει καὶ ὥρᾳ διενεγκόντες Aeschin.1.134

    , cf. ib.158;

    καλὸς ὥρᾳ τε κεκραμένος Pi.O.10(11).104

    , cf. X.Mem. 2.1.22, Pl.Lg. 837b;

    ἀφ' ὥρας ἐργάζεσθαι

     quaestum corpore facere,

    Plu.

    Tim..14, cf. X.Mem..1.6.13, Smp.8.21;

    τὴν ὥ. πεπωληκότες Phld.Rh.1.344

     S.:—then,
    b generally, beauty, grace, elegance of style, D.H.Pomp.2, Plu.2.874b, etc.;

    γλυκύτης καὶ ὥ. Hermog.Id.2.3

    , cf. Men.Rh.p.335 S., Him.Or.1.2; of beauty in general,

    χάρις καὶ ὥρα Plu.2.128d

    .
    3 Ὥρα personified, like Ἥβη, Pi.N.8.1.
    III = τὰ ὡραῖα, the produce of the season, fruits of the year,

    ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐτρέφοντο X.HG2.1.1

    .
    C personified, αἱὯραι, the Hours, keepers of heaven's cloudgate, Il.5.749, 8.393; and ministers of the gods, ib. 433;

    Ζεῦ, τεαὶ.. Ὧραι Pi.O.4.2

    ; esp. of Aphrodite, h.Hom.6.5,12; also Ὧ. Διονυσιάδες, Καρνειάδες, Simon.148, Call.Ap.87; three in number, Eunomia, Dike, Eirene, daughters of Zeus and Themis, Hes.Th. 901;

    Ωραι πολυάνθεμοι Pi.O.13.17

    , cf. Alex.261.6, Theoc.1.150, etc.: freq. joined with the Χάριτες, h.Ap. 194, Hes.Op.75; worshipped at Athens, Paus.9.35.1; at Argos, Id.2.20.5; at Attaleia, BMus.Inscr. 1044 (i B. C.).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὥρα

  • 7 ἐπίστασις

    ἐπίστασις, εως, ἡ (s. ἐφίστημι and next entry; Soph. et al. in var. mngs.; PAmh 134, 9 al. in pap; 2 Macc; EpArist; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 49; Jos., Ant. 16, 395; Just.) in our lit., both times w. the v.l. ἐπισύστασις (q.v.).
    ① responsibility for a matter, pressure, care. For ἡ ἐ. μοι ἡ καθʼ ἡμέραν 2 Cor 11:28 pressure, in the sense of anxiety caused by a heavy sense of responsibility is prob.: the daily pressure on me. Alternatives include: attention or care daily required of me (ἐ.=attention, care: Aristot., Phys. 196a, 38; Polyb. 2, 2, 2; 11, 2, 4; Diod S 29, 32 end; EpArist 256; Just., D. 28, 1); superintendence, oversight (X., Mem. 1, 5, 2 codd.; s. also L-S-J-M s.v. II 3) the burden of oversight, which lies upon me day in and day out; finally, ἐ. can also mean stopping, hindrance, delay (BGU 1832, 16; 1855, 19; Polyb. 8, 28, 13); then: the hindrances that beset me day by day. Cp. the role of the ἐπιστάτης next entry.
    ② the act of bringing someth. to a stop, stopping (X., An. 2, 4, 26; Polyb. 8, 28, 13) ἐ. ποιεῖν ὄχλου to cause a crowd to gather Ac 24:12. The phrase indicates that people stop with the result that a crowd develops; any first-century reader or auditor of Ac would prob. be aware that if Paul were responsible for collecting a mob around himself he would be at grave risk under the eyes of Roman authorities who were responsible for maintaining the peace. Hence the rendering ‘stirring up a crowd’ NRSV correctly assesses the mng of the text (cp. 2 Macc 6:3 ‘onslaught’ NRSV).—DELG s.v. ἵστημι. M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐπίστασις

  • 8 πρός

    πρός, Prep., expressing direction,
    A on the side of, in the direction of, hence c. gen., dat., and acc., from, at, to: [dialect] Ep. also [full] προτί and [full] ποτί, in Hom. usually c. acc., more rarely c. dat., and each only once c. gen., Il.11.831, 22.198:—dialectal forms: [dialect] Dor.[full] ποτί (q. v.) and [full] ποί, but Cret. [full] πορτί Leg.Gort.5.44, etc., Argive [full] προτ( [full] ί) Schwyzer 84.3 (found at Tylisus, V B.C.), restored in Mnemos.57.208(Argos, vi B.C.), and in Alcm.30; Arc., Cypr. [full] πός SIG306.11 (Tegea, iv B.C.), Inscr.Cypr. 135.19H., also sts. in Asia Minor in compds., v. ποσάγω, ποσφέρω; [dialect] Aeol. [full] πρός Sapph.69 ([etym.] προς-), 109, Alc.20 (s. v.l.); [full] πρές Jo.Gramm. Comp.3.10; Pamphylian περτ ([etym.] ί) Schwyzer 686.7, 686a4. (With [full] προτί, [full] πρός cf. Skt. práti 'towards, near to, against, back, etc.', Slav. protiv[ucaron], Lett. pret 'against', Lat. pretium: [full] ποτί (q. v.) and [full] πός are not cogn.) A. WITH GEN., πρός refers to that from which something comes:
    I of Place, from,

    ἵκετο ἠὲ π. ἠοίων ἦ ἑσπερίων ἀνθρώπων Od. 8.29

    ;

    τὸν π. Σάρδεων ἤλεκτρον S.Ant. 1037

     (v.l.).
    2 on the side of, towards, νήσοισι πρὸς Ἤλιδος towards Elis, Od.21.347; π. ἁλός, π. Θύμβρης, Il.10.428, 430;

    εἶναι π. θαλάσσης Hdt.2.154

    ;

    ἱδρῦσθαι π. τοῦ Ἑλλησπόντου Id.8.120

    ;

    ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο π. Ὀλύνθου Th.1.62

    , etc.; φυλακαὶ π. Αἰθιόπων, π. Ἀραβίων, π. Διβύης, on the frontier towards the Ethiopians, etc., Hdt.2.30: freq. with words denoting the points of the compass, δύω θύραι εἰσίν, αἱ μὲν π. βορέαο, αἱ δ' αὖ π. νότου one on the north side, the other on the south side, Od.13.110;

    οἰκέουσι π. νότου ἀνέμου Hdt.3.101

    ; π. ἄρκτου τε καὶ βορέω ἀνέμου κατοικημένοι ib. 102; π. μεσαμβρίης ib. 107; π. τοῦ Τμώλου τετραμμένον τῆς πόλιος (in such phrases the acc. is more common) Id.1.84;

    π. Πλαταιῶν Th. 3.21

    ;

    π. Νεμέας Id.5.59

    ; ἀπὸ τῆσδε τῆς ὁδοῦ τὸ π. τοῦ λιμένος ἅπαν everything on the harbour- ward side of this road, IG12.892: combined with π. c. acc.,

    π. ἠῶ τε καὶ τοῦ Τανάϊδος Hdt.4.122

    ;

    τὸν μέν π. βορέω ἑστεῶτα, τὸν δὲ π. νότον Id.2.121

    , cf. 4.17.
    3 before, in presence of,

    μάρτυροι ἔστων π. τε θεῶν μακάρων π. τε θνητῶν ἀνθρώπων Il.1.339

    ;

    οὐδ' ἐπιορκήσω π. δαίμονος 19.188

    ; ποίτοῦ Ἀπόλλωνος .. ὑπίσχομαι prob. in IG22.1126.7 (Amphict. Delph., iv B. C.); ὑποσχομένους πρὸς τοῦ Διός ib.1237.16: hence,
    b in the eyes of,

    ἄδικον οὐδὲν οὔτε π. θεῶν οὔτε π. ἀνθρώπων Th.1.71

    , cf. X.An.1.6.6, etc.; ὅσιος π. θεῶν Lex ap.And.1.97; κατειπάτω.. ἁγνῶς π. τοῦ θεοῦ if he wishes to be pure in the sight of the god, SIG986.9, cf. 17 (Chios, v/iv B. C.);

    ὁ γὰρ καιρὸς π. ἀνθρώπων βραχὺ μέτρον ἔχει Pi.P.4.286

    .
    4 in supplication or adjuration, before, and so, in the name of,

    σε.. γουνάζομαι.. π. τ' ἀλόχου καὶ πατρός Od.11.67

    ;

    π. θεῶν πατρῴων S.Ant. 839

     (lyr.), etc.; ἱκετεύω, ἀντιβολῶ π. παίδων, π. γυναικῶν, etc., D.28.20, etc.: the verb is freq. omitted with π. θεῶν or τῶν θεῶν, E.Hec. 551, S.OT 1037, Ar.V. 760;

    π. τοῦ Διός Id.Av. 130

    : less freq. with other words,

    π. τῆς ἑστίας E.Fr.953.39

    ;

    π. Χαρίτων Luc.Hist.Conscr.14

    ;

    μὴ π. γενείου S.El. 1208

    ;

    μὴ π. ξενίας τᾶς σᾶς Id.OC 515

     (lyr.): sts. in questions, π. θεῶν, τίς οὕτως εὐήθης ἐστίν; in heaven's name, D.1.15;

    π. τῆς Ἀθηνᾶς.. ; Din.1.45

    ;

    ἆρ' οὖν, ὦ π. Διός,.. ; Pl.R. 459a

    , cf. Ap. 26e: sts. in Trag. with the pron. σε between prep. and case,

    π. νύν σε πατρὸς π. τε μητρός.. ἱκνοῦμαι S.Ph. 468

    ;

    μὴ π. σε γονάτων E.Med. 324

    .
    5 of origin or descent, from, on the side of, γένος ἐξ Ἁλικαρνησσοῦ τὰ π. πατρός by the father's side, Hdt.7.99;

    Ἀθηναῖον.. καὶ τὰ π. πατρὸς καὶ τὰ π. μητρός D.57.17

    , cf. Isoc.3.42, SIG1015.7 (Halic.); πρόγονοι ἢ π. ἀνδρῶν ἢ γυναικῶν in the male or female line, Pl.Tht. 173d;

    ὁ πατὴρ π. μὲν ἀνδρῶν ἦν τῶν Εὐπατριδῶν Isoc.16.25

    ;

    οἱ συγγενεῖς τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ π. ἀνδρῶν καὶ π. γυναικῶν D.57.23

    ; οἱ π. αἵματος blood-relations, S.Aj. 1305;

    ἢ φίλων τις ἢ π. αἵματος φύσιν Id.El. 1125

    .
    II of effects proceeding from what cause soever:
    1 from, at the hand of, with Verbs of having, receiving, etc.,

    ὡς ἂν.. τιμὴν καὶ κῦδος ἄρηαι π. πάντων Δαναῶν Il.16.85

    , cf. 1.160, etc.;

    τιμὴν π. Ζηνὸς ἔχοντες Od.11.302

    ;

    δίδοι οἱ.. χάριν ποτ' ἀστῶν καὶ ποτὶ ξείνων Pi.O.7.90

    ;

    ἄνθεα τιμῆς πρὸς θνητῶν ἀνελέσθαι Emp.4.7

    ;

    φυλακῆς π. δήμου κυρῆσαι Hdt.1.59

    ;

    τυχεῖν τινος π. θεῶν A.Th. 550

    , cf. S.Aj. 527;

    λαχὼν π. δαιμόνων ὄλβον Pi.N.9.45

    ;

    κακόν τι π. θεῶν ἢ π. ἀνθρώπων λαβεῖν Hdt.2.139

    , etc.;

    μανθάνειν π. ἀστῶν S.OC13

    : with passive Verbs, προτὶ Ἀχιλλῆος δεδιδάχθαι to have been taught by.., Il.11.831, cf. S.OT 357;

    ἄριστα πεποίηται.. πρὸς Τρώων Il.6.57

    ; αἴσχε' ἀκούω π. Τρώων ib. 525, cf. Heraclit.79;

    ταῦτα.. π. τούτου κλύειν S.OT 429

    ;

    οὐ λέγεται π. οὐδαμῶν Hdt.1.47

    ; ἀτιμάζεσθαι, τετιμῆσθαι π. τινῶν, ib.61,2.75; also

    λόγου οὐδενὸς γίνεσθαι π. τινῶν Id.1.120

    ; παθεῖν τι π. τινός at the hand of, ib.73;

    π. ἀλλήλοιν θανεῖν E. Ph. 1269

    , cf. S.OT 1237; π. τῆς τύχης ὄλωλεν ib. 949;

    τὸ ποιεύμενον π. τῶν Λακεδαιμονίων Hdt.7.209

    ;

    αἰτηθέντες π. τινὸς χρήματα Id.8.111

    ;

    ἱμέρου βέλει π. σοῦ τέθαλπται A.Pr. 650

    : with an Adj. or Subst.,

    τιμήεσσα π. πόσιος Od.18.162

    ;

    ἐπίφθονος π. τῶν πλεόνων ἀνθρώπων Hdt.7.139

    ;

    ἔρημος π. φίλων S.Ant. 919

    ;

    ἀπαθὴς π. ἀστῶν Pi.P.4.297

    ;

    πειθὼ π. τινός S.El. 562

    ;

    π. Τρώων.. κλέος εἶναι Il.22.514

    ; ἄρκεσις π. ἀνδρός, δόξα π. ἀνθρώπων, S.OC73, E.Heracl. 624 (lyr.);

    ἐλίπετο ἀθάνατον μνήμην π. Ἑλλησποντίων Hdt.4.144

    : with an Adv., οἶμαι γὰρ ἂν οὐκ ἀχαρίστως μοι ἔχειν οὔτε π. ὑμῶν οὔτε π. τῆς Ἑλλάδος I shall meet with no ingratitude at your hands, X.An.2.3.18, cf. Pl.R. 463d.
    2 of things, π. τίνος ποτ' αἰτίας [τέθνηκεν]; from of by what cause? S.OT 1236; π. ἀμπλακημάτων by or by reason of.., Id.Ant.51.
    III of dependence or close connexion: hence,
    1 dependent on one, under one's protection,

    π. Διός εἰσι ξεῖνοί τε πτωχοί τε Od.6.207

    ,14.57; δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας π. Διὸς εἰρύαται by commission from him, Il.1.239; π. ἄλλης ἱστὸν ὑφαίνοις at the bidding of another, 6.456.
    2 on one's side, in one's favour, Hdt.1.75, 124, S.OT 1434, Tr. 479, etc.;

    π. τῶν ἐχόντων.. τὸν νόμον τίθης E.Alc. 57

    .
    IV of that which is derivable from: hence, agreeable to, becoming, like,

    τὰ τοιαῦτα ἔργα οὐ π. τοῦ ἅπαντος ἀνδρὸς νενόμικα γίνεσθαι, ἀλλὰπ. ψυχῆς τε ἀγαθῆς καὶ ῥώμης ἀνδρηΐης Hdt.7.153

    , cf.5.12; ἦ κάρτα π. γυναικὸς αἴρεσθαι κέαρ 'tis very like a woman, A.Ag. 592, cf. 1636;

    οὐ π. ἰατροῦ σοφοῦ θρηνεῖν ἐπῳδάς S.Aj. 581

    , cf. Ar.V. 369, E.Hel. 950, etc.;

    π. σοῦ ἐστι Id.HF 585

    , etc.;

    οὐκ ἦν π. τοῦ Κύρου τρόπου X.An. 1.2.11

    , etc.: of qualities, etc.,

    π. δυσσεβείας A.Ch. 704

    ; π. δίκης οὐδὲν τρέμων agreeably to justice, S.OT 1014, cf.El. 1211;

    οὐ π. τῆς ὑμετέρας δόξης Th.3.59

    ; ἐάν τι ἡμῖν π. λόγου ᾖ if it be at all to our purpose, Pl.Grg. 459c;

    εἰ τόδε π. τρόπου λέγω

     correctly,

    Id.R. 470c

    ; but π. τρόπου τι ὠνεῖσθαι buy at a reasonable price, Thphr.Char.30.12;

    τὰ γενήματα π. ἐλάσσονος τιμᾶς πωλῶν IG5(2).515.14

     ([place name] Lycosura); π. ἀγαθοῦ, π. κακοῦ τινί ἐστι or γίγνεται, it is to one's advantage or otherwise, Arist.Mu. 397a30, Arr.An.7.16.5, Hld.7.12; π. ἀτιμίας λαβεῖν τι to take a thing as an insult, regard it so, Plu.Cic.13;

    π. δέους λαβεῖν τι Id.Flam.7

    ; λαβεῖν τι π. ὀργῆς (v.l. ὀργήν) J.AJ8.1.3; μοι π. εὐκλείας γένοιτο ib. 18.7.7; τῷ δήμῳ π. αἰσχύνης ἂν ἦν, π. ὀνείδους ἂν ἦν τῇ πόλει, Lib.Decl.43.27,28.
    B WITH DAT., it expresses proximity, hard by, near, at,

    ποτὶ γαίῃ Od.8.190

    , 11.423;

    ποτὶ γούνασι Il.5.408

    ; ποτὶ δρυσίν among the oaks, 14.398 (nisi leg. περί)

    ; πρὸς ἄκμονι χαλκεύειν Pi.P.1.86

    ; ποτὶ γραμμᾷ στᾶσαί τινα ib.9.118; ἄγκυραν ποτὶ ναΐ κρημνάντων ib.4.24;

    δῆσαί τινα πρὸς φάραγγι A.Pr.15

    ;

    νεὼς καμούσης ποντίῳ π. κύματι Id.Th. 210

    ;

    π. μέσῃ ἀγορᾷ S.Tr. 371

    ;

    π. Ἀργείων στρατῷ Id.Aj.95

    ;

    π. πέδῳ κεῖται Id.OT 180

     (lyr.); θακεῖν π. ναοῖς ib.20, cf. A.Eu. 855;

    π. ἡλίου ναίουσι πηγαῖς Id.Pr. 808

    ;

    π. τῇ γῇ ναυμαχεῖν Th. 7.34

    ; ἐς μάχην καθίστασθαι π. (v.l. ὑπ')

    αὐτῇ τῇ πόλει Id.2.79

    ;

    τεῖχος π. τῇ θαλάσσῃ Id.3.105

    ;

    αἱ π. θαλάττῃ πόλεις X.HG4.8.1

    ; τὸ π. Αἰγίνῃ στράτευμα off Aegina, Th.1.105; Αίβυες οἱ π. Αἰγύπτῳ bordering on.., ib. 104; τὸ π. ποσί that which is close to the feet, before one, S.OT 130, etc.; θρηνεῖν ἐπῳδὰς π... πήματι over it, Id.Aj. 582; αἱ π. τῇ βάσει γωνίαι the angles at the base, Euc.1.5,al.;

    τὴν π. τῷ.. ιερῷ κρήνην IG22.338.13

    , cf. SIG1040.15 (Piraeus, iv B. C.), al.
    2 before, in the presence of, π. τοῖς θεσμοθέταις, π. τῷ διαιτητῇ λέγειν, D. 20.98,39.22;

    ὅσα π. τοῖς κριταῖς γέγονεν Id.21.18

    ;

    π. διαιτητῇ φεύγειν Id.22.28

    .
    3 with Verbs denoting motion towards a place, upon, against,

    ποτὶ δὲ σκῆπτρον βάλε γαίῃ Il.1.245

    , Od.2.80;

    με βάλῃ.. ποτὶ πέτρῃ 5.415

    , cf. 7.279, 9.284;

    νῆας ποτὶ σπιλάδεσσιν ἔαξαν 3.298

    , cf. 5.401; λιαζόμενον ποτὶ γαίῃ sinking on the ground, Il.20.420;

    ἴσχοντες πρὸς ταῖς πόλεσι Th.7.35

    .
    4 sts. with a notion of clinging closely, προτὶ οἷ λάβε clasped to him, Il.20.418;

    προτὶ οἷ εἷλε 21.507

    ;

    πρὸς ἀλλήλῃσιν ἔχονται Od.5.329

    ;

    προσπεπλασμένας.. π. ὄρεσι Hdt.3.111

    ; π. δμῳαῖσι κλίνομαι fall into the arms of.., S.Ant. 1189;

    π. τινί

     close to,

    Men. Epit. 204

    .
    II to express close engagement, at the point of,

    π. αὐτῷ γ' εἰμὶ τῷ δεινῷ λέγειν S.OT 1169

    ; engaged in or about,

    π. τῷ εἰρημένῳ λόγῳ ἦν Pl.Phd. 84c

    , cf. Phdr. 249c, 249d;

    ἂν π. τῷ σκοπεῖν.. γένησθε D.18.176

    ;

    ἀεὶ π. ᾧ εἴη ἔργῳ, τοῦτο ἔπραττεν X. HG4.8.22

    ; διατρίβειν or σχολάζειν π. τινί, Epicr.11.3 (anap.), Arist. Pol. 1308b36 (but

    π. ταῦτα ἐσχόλασα X.Mem.3.6.6

    );

    ὅλος εἶναι π. τῷ λήμματι D.19.127

    ;

    π. τῇ ἀνάγκῃ ταύτῃ γίγνεσθαι Aeschin.1.74

    ; τὴν διάνοιαν, τὴν γνώμην ἔχειν π. τινί, Pl.R. 500b, Aeschin.3.192; κατατάξαι αὐτὸν π. γράμμασιν, i.e. give him a post as clerk, PCair.Zen. 342.3 (iii B. C.);

    ὁ π. τοῖς γράμμασι τεταγμένος Plb.15.27.7

    , cf. 5.54.7, D.S.2.29,3.22;

    ἐπιμελητὴς π. τῇ εἰκασίᾳ τοῦ σησάμου PTeb.713.2

    , cf.709.1 (ii B. C.).
    III to express union or addition, once in Hom., ἄασάν μ' ἕταροί τε κακοὶ π. τοῖσί τε ὕπνος and besides them sleep, Od.10.68;

    π. τοῖς παροῦσιν ἄλλα

     in addition to,

    A.Pr. 323

    , cf. Pers. 531, Xenoph.8.3. Emp.59.3;

    ἄλλους π. ἑαυτῷ Th.1.90

    ; π. ταῖς ἡμετέραις [τριήρεσι] Id.6.90;

    δέκα μῆνας π. ἄλλοις πέντε S.Tr.45

    ;

    τρίτος.. π. δέκ' ἄλλαισιν γοναῖς A.Pr. 774

    ; κυβερνήτης π. τῇ σκυτοτομίᾳ in addition to his trade of leather-cutter, Pl.R. 397e: freq. with neut. Adjs., π. τῷ νέῳ ἁπαλός besides his youth, Id.Smp. 195c, cf. Tht. 185e;

    π. τῷ βλαβερῷ καὶ ἀηδέστατον Id.Phdr. 240b

    ; π. τούτοισι besides this, Hdt.2.51, cf. A.Pers. 237 (troch.), etc.; rarely in sg.,

    π. τούτῳ Hdt.1.31

    ,41; π. τοῖς ἄλλοις besides all the rest, Th.2.61, etc.:—cf. the Advb. usage, infr. D.
    C WITH ACCUS., it expresses motion or direction towards an object:
    I of Place, towards, to, with Verbs of Motion,

    ἰέναι π. Ὄλυμπον Il.1.420

    ; ἰέναι π. δώματα, etc., Od.2.288, etc.;

    ἰέναι π. ἠῶ τ' ἠέλιόν τε Il.12.239

    ; φέρειν προτὶ ἄστυ, ἄγειν προτὶ Ἴλιον, etc., 13.538, 657, etc.; ἄγεσθαιπρὸς οἶκον, ἐρύεσθαι ποτὶ Ἴλιον, 9.147,18.174; ὠθεῖν, δίεσθαι προτὶ ἄστυ, 16.45, 15.681, etc.;

    ῥίπτασκε ποτὶ νέφεα Od.8.374

    ;

    βαλεῖν ποτὶ πέτρας 12.71

    ;

    κυλινδόμενα προτὶ χέρσον 9.147

    ; ἀπῆλθε πρὸς ἑαυτόν returned to his home, LXX Nu.24.25; κληθῆναι π. τὸ δεῖπνον (rarer than ἐπὶ δεῖπνον) Plu. Cat.Ma.3.
    2 with Verbs implying previous motion, upon, against, π. τεῖχος, π. κίονα ἐρείσας, Il.22.112, Od.8.66;

    ἅρματα.. ἔκλιναν π. ἐνώπια Il.8.435

    ;

    ἔγχος ἔστησε π. κίονα Od.1.127

    ;

    ποτὶ τοῖχον ἀρηρότες 2.342

    ;

    ποτὶ βωμὸν ἵζεσθαι 22.334

    ;

    πρὸς γοῦνα καθέζετό τινος 18.395

    ;

    π. ἄλλοτ' ἄλλον πημονὴ προσιζάνει A.Pr. 278

    ;

    τὰ πολλὰ πατρὸς π. τάφον κτερίσματα S.El. 931

    ; χῶρον π. αὐτὸν τόνδ' dub. in Id.Ph.23; later,

    ἔστη π. τὸν στῦλον LXX 4 Ki.23.3

    ;

    ὁ ὄχλος π. τὴν θάλασσαν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἦσαν Ev.Marc.4.1

    ; π. ὑμᾶς παραμενῶ with you, 1 Ep.Cor.16.6;

    ἐκήδευσαν τὸν.. πατέρα.. π. τοὺς λοιποὺς συγγενεῖς

     beside,

    Supp.Epigr.6.106

     ([place name] Cotiaeum).
    b of addition,

    ποὶ τὰν στάλαν ποιγραψάνσθω τάδε SIG56.46

    (Argos, v B. C.);

    ἵππον προσετίθει πρὸς τοὔνομα Ar.Nu.63

    , cf. Hdt.6.125, X.HG1.5.6, Pl.Phlb. 33c, Arist.Rh. 1359b28; προσεδαπάνησε π. τὸ μερισθὲν αὐτῷ εἰς τὸ ἔλαιον ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων over and above the sum allotted to him, IG22.1227.9; προσετέθη π. τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ was gathered to his people, LXX Ge.49.33.
    3 with Verbs of seeing, looking, etc., towards,

    ἰδεῖν π. τινά Od.12.244

    , al.; ὁρᾶν, ἀποβλέπειν π. τι or τινά, A.Supp. 725, Ar.Ach. 291, etc.;

    ἀνταυγεῖ π. Ὄλυμπον Emp.44

    ; στάντε ποτὶ πνοιήν so as to face it, Il.11.622 (similarly, πέτονται πρὸς τὸ πνεῦμα against the wind, Arist.HA 597a32); κλαίεσκε π. οὐρανόν cried to heaven, Il.8.364: freq. of points of the compass, π. ζόφον κεῖσθαι lie towards the West, Od.9.26;

    ναίειν π. ἠῶ τ' ἠέλιόν τε 13.240

    ;

    στάντα π. πρώτην ἕω S.OC 477

    ; so in Prose,

    π. ἠῶ τε καὶ ἡλίου ἀνατολάς Hdt. 1.201

    , cf. 4.40;

    π. βορέην τε καὶ νότον Id.2.149

    ; also

    ἀκτὴ π. Τυρσηνίην τετραμμένη τῆς Σικελίης Id.6.22

     (v. supr. A. 1.2); π. ἥλιον facing the sun, and so, in the sunlight, Ar.V. 772; so π. λύχνον by lamplight, Id. Pax 692, Jul.Ep.4;

    π. τὸ λύχνον Hippon.22

     Diehl, cf. Arist.Mete. 375a27;

    πὸτ τὸ πῦρ Ar.Ach. 751

    ;

    πρὸς τὸ πῦρ Pl.R. 372d

    , cf. Arist.Pr. 870a21; π. φῶς in open day, S.El. 640; but, by torch-light, Plu.2.237a.
    4 in hostile sense, against,

    π. Τρῶας μάχεαι Il.17.471

    ;

    ἐστρατόωνθ'.. π. τείχεα Θήβης 4.378

    ; π. δαίμονα against his will, 17.98;

    βεβλήκει π. στῆθος 4.108

    ;

    γούνατ' ἐπήδα π. ῥόον ἀΐσσοντος 21.303

    ;

    χρὴ π. θεὸν οὐκ ἐρίζειν Pi.P.2.88

    ;

    π. τοὐμὸν σπέρμα χωρήσαντα S.Tr. 304

    ;

    ἐπιέναι π. τινάς Th.2.65

    ;

    ὅσα ἔπραξαν οἱ Ἕλληνες π. τε ἀλλήλους καὶ τὸν βάρβαρον Id.1.118

    ;

    ἀγωνίζεσθαι π. τινά Pl.R. 579c

    ;

    ἀντιτάττεσθαι π. πόλιν X.Cyr.3.1.18

    : also in argument, in reply to,

    ταῦτα π. τὸν Πιττακὸν εἴρηται Pl.Prt. 345c

    ; and so in the titles of judicial speeches, πρός τινα in reply to, less strong than κατά τινος against or in accusation, D.20 tit., etc.;

    μήτε π. ἐμὲ μήτε κατ' ἐμοῦ δίκην εἶναι Is.11.34

    .
    5 without any hostile sense,

    π. ἀλλήλους ἔπεα πτερόεντ' ἀγόρευον Il.3.155

    ,cf.5.274,11.403,17.200;

    π.ξεῖνον φάσθαι ἔπος ἠδ' ἐπακοῦσαι Od.17.584

    ; λέγειν, εἰπεῖν, φράζειν π. τινά, Hdt. 1.8,90, Ar.V. 335, Nu. 359;

    ἀπαγγεῖλαι π. τινάς A.Ch. 267

    ;

    μνησθῆναι π. τινά Lys.1.19

    , etc.;

    ἀμείψασθαι π. τινά Hdt.8.60

     codd.;

    ἀποκρίνεσθαι π. τινάς Ar.Ach. 632

    , Th.5.42; ὤμοσε δὲ π. ἔμ' αὐτόν he swore to me, Od.14.331: π. sts. governs the reflex. pron.,

    διαλογίζεσθαι π. ὑμᾶς αὐτούς Is.7.45

    ; ἀναμνήσθητε, ἐνθυμήθητε π. ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, Isoc.6.52, 15.60;

    π. ἐμαυτὸν.. ἐλογιζόμην Pl.Ap. 21d

    ; μινύρεσθαι, ἄδειν π. ἑαυτόν, Ar.Ec. 880, 931;

    ἐπικωκύω.. αὐτὴ π. αὑτήν S.El. 285

    .
    b π. σφέας ἔχειν δοκέουσι, i.e. they think they are pregnant, Hp.Nat.Puer. 30.
    6 of various kinds of intercourse or reciprocal action, π... Διομήδεα τεύχε' ἄμειβεν changed arms with Diomedes, Il.6.235;

    ὅσα.. ξυμβόλαια.. ἦν τοῖς ἰδιώταις π. τοὺς ἰδιώτας ἢ ἰδιώτῃ π. τὸ κοινόν IG12.116.19

    ; σπονδάς, συνθήκας ποιεῖσθαι π. τινά, Th.4.15, Plb.1.17.6;

    ξυγχωρεῖν π. τινάς Th.2.59

    ;

    γίγνεται ὁμολογία π. τινάς Id.7.82

    , cf. Hdt. 1.61;

    π. τινὰς ξυμμαχίαν ποιεῖς θαι Th.5.22

    ;

    π. ἀλλήλους ἡσυχίαν εἶχον καὶ π. τοὺς ἄλλους.. εἰρήνην ἦγον Isoc.7.51

    ;

    π. ἀλλήλους ἔχθραι τε καὶ στέργηθρα A.Pr. 491

    ; also

    σαίνειν ποτὶ πάντας Pi.P.2.82

    , cf. O.4.6;

    παίζειν πρός τινας E.HF 952

    , etc.;

    ἀφροδισιάζειν π. τινά X.Mem.1.3.14

    ;

    ἀγαθὸς γίγνεσθαι π. τινά Th.1.86

    ;

    εὐσεβὴς π. τινὰς πέλειν A.Supp. 340

    ; διαλέγεσθαι π. τινά converse with.., X.Mem.1.6.1, Aeschin.2.38,40, 3.219;

    κοινοῦσθαι π. τινάς Pl.Lg. 930c

    ;

    π. τοὺς οἰκέτας ἀνακοινοῦσθαι περὶ τῶν μεγίστων Thphr.Char.4.2

    ; διαλογίζεσθαι π. τινά balance accounts with.., D.52.3, cf. SIG241.127 (Delph., iv B. C.);

    ἃ ἔχει διελόμενος π. τὸν ἀδελφόν IG12(7).55.8

     (Amorgos, iv/iii B. C.), cf. D. 47.34.
    b in phrases of the form ἡ π. τινὰ εὔνοια (ἔχθρα, etc.), π. sts. means towards, as ἡ π. αὑτοὺς φιλία the affection of their wives towards or for them, X.Cyr.3.1.39;

    ἡ π. ὑμᾶς ἔχθρα Id.HG3.5.10

    ;

    ἡ ἀπέχθεια ἡ π. τοὺς πλουσίους Arist.Pol. 1305a23

    ;

    τὴν π. τοὺς τετελευτηκότας εὔνοιαν ὑπάρχουσαν D.18.314

    , cf. SIG352.13 (Ephesus, iv/iii B. C.), al.;

    φυσικαὶ τοκέων στοργαὶ π. τέκνα ποθεινά IG12(5).305.13

     ([place name] Paros): but sts. at the hands of, ἡ π. τὸ θεῖον εὐμένεια the favour of the gods, Th.5.105; φθόνος τοῖς ζῶσι π. τὸ ἀντίπαλον jealousy is incurred by the living at the hands of their rivals, Id.2.45; τὴν ἀπέχθειαν τὴν π. Θηβαίους.. τῇ πόλει γενέσθαι the hostility incurred by Athens at the hands of the Thebans, D.18.36, cf.6.3, 19.85; τῇ φιλίᾳ τῇ π. τὸν τετελευτηκότα the friendship with (not 'affection for') the deceased, Is.1.17, cf. Pl.Ap. 21c, 28a, Isoc.15.101,19.50, Lycurg.135, Din.1.19, etc.;

    τίνος ὄντος ἐμοὶ π. ὑμᾶς ἐγκλήματος; Lys.10.23

    , cf. 16.10;

    τιμώμενος.. διὰ τὴν π. ὑμᾶς πίστιν Din.3.12

    , cf. Lys.12.67, D.20.25; τῷ φόβῳ τῷ π. ὑμᾶς the fear inspired by you, Id.25.93; τῇ π. Ῥωμαίους εὐνοία his popularity with the Romans, Plb.23.7.5.
    7 of legal or other business transacted before a magistrate, witness, etc.,

    τάδε ὁ σύλλογος ἐβουλεύσατο.. π. μνήμονας SIG45.8

     (Halic., v B. C.), cf. IG7.15.1 (Megara, ii B. C.); γράφεσθαι αὐτὸν κλοπῆς.. π. τοὺς ἐπιμελητάς ib.12.65.46; ἀτέλειαν εἶναι αὐτῷ καὶ δίκας π. τὸν πολέμαρχον ib.153.7; λόγον διδόντων τῶν.. χρημάτων.. π. τοὺς λογιστάς ib.91.27; before a jury,

    ἔστι δὲ τούτοις μὲν π. ὑμᾶς ἁγών, ὑμῖν δὲ π. ἅπασαν τὴν πόλιν Lys. 26.14

    ;

    ἀντιδικῆσαι τῷ παιδὶ.. π. ὑμᾶς Is.11.19

     codd. (dub.); before a witness to whom an appeal for corroboration is made, Id.3.25;

    ὀμόσαντες πὸ (τ) τὸν θεόν Schwyzer 418.11

     ([place name] Elis); φέρρεν αὐτὸν πὸ (τ) τὸν Δία in the eyes of Zeus, ib.415.7(ibid.); λαχεῖν πρὸς τὸν ἄρχοντα, γράφεσθαι π. τοὺς θεσμοθέτας, D.43.15, Lex ib.21.47, cf. Arist.Ath.56.6;

    τοῖς ἐμπόροις εἶναι τὰς δίκας π. τοὺς θεσμοθέτας D.33.1

    ; θέντων τὰ.. ποτήρια.. π. Πολύχαρμον having pawned the cups with P., IPE12.32A15 (Olbia, iii B. C.); also

    διαβάλλειν τινὰ π. τοὺς πολλούς X. Mem. 1.2.31

    , cf. D.7.33.
    II of Time, towards or near a certain time, at or about,

    ποτὶ ἕσπερα Od.17.191

    ;

    ποτὶἕσπερον Hes.Op. 552

    ;

    πρὸς ἑσπέραν Pl.R. 328a

    ;

    ἐπεὶ π. ἑσπέραν ἦν X.HG4.3.22

    ;

    π. ἡμέραν Id.An.4.5.21

    ;

    π. ὄρθρον Ar.Lys. 1089

    ; ποτ' ὄρθρον (nisi leg. πότορθρον) Theoc.5.126, Erinn. in PSI9.1090.48 + 8 (p.xii);

    πρὸς ἕω Ar.Ec. 312

    ; π.ἀῶ ἐγρέσθαι, π. ἡμέραν ἐξεγρέσθαι, Theoc.18.55, Pl.Smp. 223c; π. γῆρας, π. τὸ γῆρας, in old age, E.Med. 592, Pl.Lg. 653a; π. εὐάνθεμον φυάν in the bloom of life, Pi.O.1.67; μέχρις ὅτου π. γυναῖκας ὦσι, i.e.of marriageable age, IG22.1368.41: later, π.τὸ παρόν for the moment, Luc.Ep. Sat.28, etc.; v. infr. 111.5.
    III of Relation between two objects,
    1 in reference to, in respect of, touching, τὰ π. τὸν πόλεμον military matters, equipments, etc., Th.2.17, etc.; τὰ π. τὸν βασιλέα our relations to the King, D.14.2; τὰ π. βασιλέα πράγματα the negotiations with the King, Th.1.128; τὰ π. τοὺς θεούς our relations, i.e. duties, to the gods, S.Ph. 1441;

    μέτεστι π. τὰ ἴδια διάφορα πᾶσι τὸ ἴσον.. ἐλευθέρως δὲ τὰ π. τὸ κοινὸν πολιτεύομεν Th.2.37

    ;

    οὐδὲν διοίσει π. τὸ γενέσθαι..

     in respect of..,

    Arist.APr. 24a25

    , cf. Pl.Phd. 111b; ἕτερος λόγος, οὐ π. ἐμέ that is another matter, and does not concern me, D.18.44, cf. 21,60, Isoc.4.12; τῶν φορέτρων ὄντων π. ἐμέ freightage shall be my concern, i.e. borne by me, PAmh.91.18 (ii A. D.);

    π. τοῦτον ἦν ἡ τῶν διαφόρων πρᾶξις LXX 2 Ma.4.28

    ; ἐὰν.. βοᾷ καὶ σχετλιάζῃ μηδὲν π. τὸ πρᾶγμα, nihil ad rem, D.40.61; οὐδὲν π. τὸν Διόνυσον Prov. ap.Plb.39.2.3, Suid.; οὐδὲν αὐτῷ π. τὴν πόλιν ἐστίν he owes no reckoning to the State, D.21.44;

    λόγος ἐστὶν ἐμοὶ π. Ἀθηναίους Philonid. 1

     D.;

    π. Ἰάσονά ἐστιν αὐτῷ περὶ τῆς τιμῆς PHamb.27.8

     (iii B. C.), cf. PCair.Zen.150.18 (iii B. C.); ἔσται αὐτῷ π. τὸν Θεόν (sc. ὁ λόγος ) he shall have to reckon with God, Supp.Epigr.6.188, cf. 194, al. ([place name] Eumenia); without αὐτῷ, ib.236 ([place name] Phrygia);

    ἔσται π. τὴν Τριάδαν MAMA1.168

    , cf. Supp.Epigr.6.302 (Laodicea Combusta); ἕξει π. τὸν Θεόν ib.300, al. (ibid.); ἕξει π. τὴν ἐωνίαν κρίσιν ib.4.733 ([place name] Eukhaita), cf. 6.841 ([place name] Cyprus);

    π. πολλοὺς ἔχων ἀγωνιστάς Suid.

     s.v. ὅσα μῦς ἐν πίσσῃ, cf. 2 Ep.Cor.5.12: with Advbs.,

    ἀσφαλῶς ἔχειν π. τι X.Mem.1.3.14

    , etc.; [τὸ or τὰ] πρός τι, the relative term or terms, Arist.Cat. 1b25, 6a36, al.; τὸ π. τι, Pythag. name for two, Theol.Ar.8; π. ἡμᾶς relatively to us, opp. ἁπλῶς, Arist.APo. 72a1; ὀρθὸς πρός or ποτί c. acc., perpendicular to, Archim.Sph.Cyl.2.3, Spir.20; ἁ Δζ ποτὶ τὰν ΑΔ ἀμβλεῖαν ποιεῖ γωνίαν ib.16.
    2 in reference to, in consequence of,

    πρὸς τοῦτο τὸ κήρυγμα Hdt.3.52

    , cf. 4.161;

    π. τὴν φήμην

     in view of..,

    Id.3.153

    , cf. Th.8.39;

    χαλεπαίνειν π. τι Id.2.59

    ;

    ἀθύμως ἔχειν π. τι X.HG4.5.4

    , etc.: with neut. Pron.,

    π. τί;

     wherefore? to what end?

    S.OT 766

    , 1027, etc.; π. οὐδέν for nothing, in vain, Id.Aj. 1018; π. οὐδὲν ἀναγκαῖον unnecessarily, Sch.Il.9.23;

    π. ταῦτα

     therefore, this being so,

    Hdt.5.9

    ,40, A.Pr. 915, 992, S.OT 426, etc.; cf. οὗτος c. v111.1b.
    3 in reference to or for a purpose,

    ἕστηκεν.. μῆλα π. σφαγάς A.Ag. 1057

    ; χρήσιμος, ἱκανὸς π. τι, Pl.Grg. 474d, Prt. 322b;

    ὡς π. τί χρείας; S.OT 1174

    , cf. OC71, Tr. 1182;

    ἕτοιμος π. τι X.Mem.4.5.12

    ;

    ἱκανῶς ὡς π. τὴν παροῦσαν χρείαν Arist. Cael. 269b21

    ;

    ἢν ἀρήγειν φαίνηται π. τὴν σύμπασαν νοῦσον Hp.Acut. 60

    ; ποιεῖ π. ἐπιλημπτικούς is efficacious for cases of epilepsy, Dsc.1.6;

    ἐθέλοντες τὰ π. τὴν νοῦσον ἡδέα μᾶλλον ἢ τὰ π. τὴν ὑγιείην προσδέχεσθαι Hp. de Arte7

    .
    b with a view to or for a future time,

    ὅπως.. γράμματα δῷ π. ἢν ἂν ἡμέραν ἑκάτεροι παραγίνωνται SIG679.62

     (Senatus consultum, ii B. C.);

    θαυμάζεται τὰ Περικλέους ἔργα π. πολὺν χρόνον ἐν ὀλίγῳ γενόμενα Plu.Per.13

    .
    c = πρός B. 11,

    ἐγίνετο π. ἀναζογήν Plb.3.92.8

    ;

    ὄντων π. τὸ κωλύειν Id.1.26.3

    , cf. 1.29.3, al., Plu.Nic.5.
    4 in proportion or relation to, in comparison with,

    κοῖός τις δοκέοι ἀνὴρ εἶναι π. τὸν πατέρα Κῦρον Hdt.3.34

    ;

    ἔργα λόγου μέζω π. πᾶσαν χώρην Id.2.35

    ;

    π. πάντας τοὺς ἄλλους Id.3.94

    , 8.44;

    πολλὴν ἂν οἶμαι ἀπιστίαν τῆς δυνάμεως.. π. τὸ κλέος αὐτῶν εἶναι Th.1.10

    , cf. Pi.O.2.88, Pl. Prt. 327d, 328c, Phd. 102c, etc.; π. τὰς μεγίστας καὶ ἐλαχίστας ναῦς τὸ μέσον σκοπεῖν the mean between.., Th.1.10;

    τὸ κάλλιστον τῶν ἔργων π. τὸ αἴσχιστον συμβαλεῖν Lycurg.68

    ;

    ἓν π. ἓν συμβάλλειν Hdt.4.50

    ; also

    ἔχεις π. τὰ ἔτη μέλαιναν τὴν τρίχα Thphr. Char.2.3

    ;

    ἐνδεεστέρως ἢ π. τὴν ἐξουσίαν Th.4.39

    : also of mathematical ratio, οἷος ὁ πρῶτος (sc. ὅρος)

    ποτὶ τὸν δεύτερον, καὶ ὁ δεύτερος ποτὶ τὸν τρίτον Archyt.2

    , cf. Philol.11, Pl.Ti. 36b, Arist.Rh. 1409a4, al., Euc. 5 Def.4, etc.; πρὸς παρεὸν.. μῆτις ἀέξεται ἀνθρώποισι in proportion to the existing (physical development), Emp.106: also of price, value, πωλεῖσθαι δὶς π. ἀργύριον sells twice against or relatively to silver, i.e. for twice its weight in silver, Thphr.HP9.6.4;

    πωλεῖται ὁ σταθμὸς αὐτοῦ π. διπλοῦν ἀργύριον Dsc.1.19

    ; [ἡ μαργαρῖτις λίθος] πωλεῖται.. π. χρυσίον for its weight in gold, Androsthenes ap.Ath.3.93b: metaph.,

    π. ἀρετήν Pl.Phd. 69a

    ; ὅπως π. τὰς τιμὰς τῶν κριθῶν τὰ ἄλφιτα πωλήσουσι on the basis of the price of barley, Arist.Ath.51.3; ἐξέστω αὐτοῦ ἀπογραφὴ τῆς οὐσίας π. τοῦτο τὸ ἀργύριον Ἀθηναίων τῷ βουλομένῳ property equal in value to this silver, IG22.1013.14, cf. PHib. 1.32.9 (iii B. C.), IG5(1).1390.78 (Andania, i B. C.);

    τῶν ἐγγύων τῶν ἐγγυωμένων π. [αὐτὰ] τὰ κτήματα SIG364.42

     (Ephesus, iii B. C.);

    θέντων τὰ ποτήρια π. χρυσοῦς ἑκατόν IPE12.32A16

     (Olbia, iii B. C.); τοὺς ἀπαγομένους εἰς φυλακὴν π. τὰ χρέα imprisoned for debt, Plb. 38.11.10, cf. 1.72.5, 5.27.4,5,7,5.108.1, PTeb.707.9 (ii B. C.);

    τοὺς π. καταδίκας ἐκπεπτωκότας Plb.25.3.1

    , cf. SIG742.31 (Ephesus, i B. C.);

    ἐγδίδομεν τὸ ἔργον.. π. χαλκόν IG7.3073.6

     (Lebad., ii B. C.), cf. PSI5.356.7 (iii B. C.), PTeb. 825 (a).16 (ii B. C.), Sammelb.5106.3 (ii B. C.);

    οἷον π. ἀργύριον τὴν δόξαν τὰς ψυχὰς ἀποδιδόμενοι Jul. Or.1.42b

    ; π. ἅλας ἠγορασμένος, i.e. 'dirt cheap', Men.828 (also π. ἅλα δειπνεῖν καὶ κύαμον, i.e. dine frugally, take pot-luck, Plu.2.684f); so

    ἡδονὰς π. ἡδονὰς.. καταλλάττεσθαι Pl.Phd. 69a

    ; of measurements of time by the flow from the clepsydra,

    π. ἕνδεκα ἀμφορέας ἐν διαμεμετρημένῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ κρίνομαι Aeschin.2.126

    , cf. Arist.Ath.67.2,3,69.2;

    λεγέσθω τᾶς δίκας ὁ μὲν πρᾶτος λόγος ἑκατέροις ποτὶ χόας δεκαοκτώ SIG953.17

     (Calymna, ii B. C.); λεξάντων πρὸς τὴν τήρησιν τοῦ ὕδατος ib.683.60 (Olympia, ii B. C.); π. κλεψύδραν Eub.p.182 K., Epin. 2;

    π. κλεψύδρας Arist.Po. 1451a8

    ;

    π. ὀλίγον ὕδωρ ἀναγκαζόμενος λέγειν D.41.30

    ; hence later, π. ὀλίγον for a short time,

    ἐπανεῖναι π. ὀλίγον τὴν πολιορκίαν J.BJ5.9.1

    , cf. Alex.Aphr. in Top.560.2, Hld.2.19, POxy67.14 (iv A.D.), Orib.Fr.116, Gp.4.15.8; π.ὀλίγον καιρόν, χρόνον, Antyll. ap. Orib.9.24.26, Paul.Aeg.Prooem.; π. ὀλίγον ἐστὶ τὸ ζῆν Poet. in Mus.Script.p.452 von Jan;

    μήτηρ δ' ἦν π. μικρόν Sammelb. 7288.4

     ([place name] Ptolemaic);

    π. βραχύ Jul.Or.1.47b

     (but π. βραχὺ παρηβηκυίας (by) a little past their best, Gp.4.15.3);

    π. βραχὺν καιρόν Iamb. Protr. 21

    .

    κα'; π. τὸ ἀκαρές Porph.Gaur.3.3

    ;

    π. μίαν ἢ δευτέραν ἡμέραν Dsc. 2.101

    , cf. Sor.1.56;

    π. δύο ἡμέρας ἐκοίμησα ἐκεῖ BGU775.8

     (ii A. D.);

    π.μόνην τὴν ἐνεστῶσαν ἡμέραν Sammelb. 7399

     (ii A.D.), cf. M.Ant.12.4;

    προστιμάσθω π. χρόνον μὴ εἰσελθεῖν ὅσον ἂν δόξῃ IG22.1368.89

    .
    5 in or by reference to, according to, in view of,

    π. τὸ παρεὸν βουλεύεσθαι Hdt. 1.20

    , cf. 113, Th.6.46,47, IG22.1.20, etc.;

    π. τὴν παροῦσαν ἀρρωστίαν Th.7.47

    ;

    ἵνα π. τὸν ὑπάρχοντα καιρὸν ἕκαστα θεωρῆτε D.18.17

    , cf. 314, etc.;

    εἴ τι δεῖ τεκμαίρεσθαι π. τὸν ἄλλον τρόπον Id.27.22

    ; τοῖς π. ὑμᾶς ζῶσι those who live with your interests in view, Id.19.226;

    ἐλευθέρου τὸ μὴ π. ἄλλον ζῆν Arist.Rh. 1367a32

    ;

    π. τοῦτον πάντ' ἐσκόπουν, π. τοῦτον ἐποιοῦντο τὴν εἰρήνην D.19.63

    ; τὸ παιδεύεσθαι π. τὰς πολιτείας suitably to them, Arist.Pol. 1310a14; ὁρῶ.. ἅπαντας π. τὴν παροῦσαν δύναμιν τῶν δικαίων ἀξιουμένους according to their power, D.15.28;

    π. τὰς τύχας γὰρ τὰς φρένας κεκτήμεθα

     according to..,

    E.Hipp. 701

    ; πὸς τὰς συνθέσις in accordance with the agreements, IG5(2).343.41,60 (Orchom. Arc.); τὸν δικαστὰν ὀμνύντα κρῖναι πορτὶ τὰ μωλιόμενα having regard to the pleadings, Leg.Gort.5.44, cf. 9.30; αἱ ἀρχαὶ.. πρὸς τὰ κατεσκευασμένα σύμβολα σηκώματα ποιησάμεναι after making weights and measures in accordance with, or by reference to, the established standards, IG22.1013.7; π. τὰ στάθμια τὰ ἐν τῷ ἀργυροκοπίῳ as measured by the weights in the mint, ib. 30, cf. PAmh.43.10 (ii B. C.); [Εόλων] ἐποίησε σταθμὰ π. τὸ νόμισμα made (trade-) weights on the basis of (i.e. proportional to) the coinage, Arist.Ath.10.2;

    ὀρθὸν π. τὸν διαβήτην IG22.1668.9

    , cf. 95,7.3073.108 (Lebad., ii B. C.); π. τὸ δικαιότατον in accordance with the most just principle, D.C.Fr.104.6.
    6 with the accompaniment of musical instruments,

    π. κάλαμον Pi.O.10(11).84

    ; π. αὐλόν or τὸν αὐλόν, E.Alc. 346, X.Smp.6.3, etc.;

    π. λύραν.. ᾄδειν SIG662.13

     (Delos, ii B. C.); π. ῥυθμὸν ἐμβαίνειν to step in time, D.S.5.34.
    7 [full] πρός c.acc. freq. periphr. for Adv., π. βίαν, = βιαίως, under compulsion,

    νῦν χρὴ.. τινα π. βίαν πώνην Alc.20

     (s.v.l.);

    π. βίαν ἐπίνομεν Ar.Ach.73

    ;

    τὸ π. βίαν πίνειν ἴσον πέφυκε τῷ διψῆν κακόν S.Fr. 735

    ; ἥκω.. π. βίαν under compulsion, Critias 16.10 D.; by force, forcibly, A.Pr. 210, 355, etc.; οὐ π. βίαν τινός not forced by any one, Id.Eu.5 (but also, in spite of any one, S.OC 657);

    π. τὸ βίαιον A.Ag. 130

     (lyr.);

    π. τὸ καρτερόν Id.Pr. 214

    ; π. ἀλκήν, π. ἀνάγκαν, Id.Th. 498, Pers. 569 (lyr.);

    οὐ διαχωρέεει [ἡ γαστὴρ] εἰ μὴ π. ἀνάγκην Hp. Prog.8

    ,19;

    π. ἰσχύος κράτος S.Ph. 594

    ;

    π. ἡδονὴν εἶναί τινι A.Pr. 494

    ; π. ἡδονὴν λέγειν, δημηγορεῖν, so as to please, Th.2.65, S.El. 921, D.4.38, cf. E.Med. 773;

    οἱ πάντα π. ἡδονὴν ἐπαινοῦντες Arist.EN 1126b13

    ;

    ἅπαντα π. ἡδ. ζητεῖν D.1.15

    , cf. 18.4; λούσασθαι τὸ σῶμα π. ἡδ. as much or little as one like s, Hp.Mul.2.133;

    πίνειν π. ἡδ. Pl. Smp. 176e

    ; π. τὸ τερπνόν calculated to delight, Th.2.53; π. χάριν so as to gratify,

    μήτε π. ἔχθραν ποιεῖσθαι λόγον μήτε π. χ. D.8.1

    , cf. S.OT 1152;

    π. χάριν δημηγορεῖν D.3.3

    , etc.: c. gen. rei, π. χάριν τινός for the sake of,

    π. χ. βορᾶς S.Ant.30

    , cf. Ph. 1156 (lyr.);

    π. ἰσχύος χ.

     by means of,

    E.Med. 538

    ; π. ὀργήν with anger, angrily, S.El. 369, Th.2.65, D.53.16 (v.l.);

    π. ὀργὴν ἐλθεῖν τινι Id.39.23

    , etc.; π. τὸ λιπαρές importunately, S.OC 1119;

    π. εὐσέβειαν Id.El. 464

    ; π. καιρόν seasonably, Id.Aj.38, etc.;

    π. φύσιν Id.Tr. 308

    ; π. εὐτέλειαν cheaply, Antiph.226.2; π. μέρος in due proportion, D.36.32;

    π. ὀλίγον μέρος Gp.2.15.1

    ; τέτραπτο π. ἰθύ οἱ straight towards him, Il.14.403; π. ὀρθὰς (sc. γωνίας ( .. τῇ AEB at right angles to, Arist.Mete. 373a14, cf. Euc.1.11, Archim.Sph.Cyl.1.3;

    π. ὀρθὴν τέμνουσα Arist.Mete. 363b2

    ; π. ἀχθηδόνα, π. ἀπέχθειαν, Luc.Tox.9, Hist.Conscr.38; γυνὴ π. ἀλήθειαν οὖσα in truth a woman, a very woman, Ath.15.687a, cf. Luc. JTr.48, Alex.61: c. [comp] Sup., π. τὰ μέγιστα in the highest degree, Hdt.8.20.
    8 of Numbers. up to, about, Plb.16.7.5, etc.: cf. πρόσπου.
    D ABS. AS ADV., besides, over and above; in Hom. always π. δέ or ποτὶ δέ, Il.5.307, 10.108, al., cf. Hdt.1.71, etc.; π. δὲ καί ib. 164, 207;

    π. δὲ ἔτι Id.3.74

    ;

    καὶ π. Id.7.154

    , 184, prob. in A.Ch. 301, etc.;

    καὶ π. γε E.Hel. 110

    , Pl.R. 328a, 466e;

    καὶ.. γε π. A.Pr.73

    ;

    καὶ δὴ π. Hdt.5.67

    ; freq. at the end of a second clause,

    τάδε λέγω, δράσω τε π. E.Or. 622

    ;

    ἀλογία.., καὶ ἀμαθία γε π. Pl.Men. 90e

    , cf. E.Ph. 610;

    ἐνενήκοντα καὶ μικρόν τι π. D.4.28

    , cf. 22.60.
    I motion towards, as προσάγω, προσέρχομαι, etc.
    II addition, besides, as προσκτάομαι, προσδίδωμι, προστίθημι, etc.
    III a being on, at, by, or beside: hence, a remaining beside, and metaph. connexion and engagement with anything, as πρόσειμι, προσγίγνομαι, etc.
    F REMARKS,
    1 in poetry πρός sts. stands after its case and before an attribute,

    ποίμνας βουστάσεις τε π. πατρός A.Pr. 653

    , cf. Th. 185, S.OT 178 (lyr.), E.Or.94; ἄστυ πότι (or ποτὶ)

    σφέτερον Il.17.419

    , cf. Pi.O.4.5.
    2 in Hom. it is freq. separated from its Verb by tmesis.
    3 sts. (in violation of the rule given by A.D.Synt.127.8, Pron.42.5) followed by an enclit. Pron.,

    πρός με S.Aj. 292

    , Ar.Pl. 1055, D.18.14 (v.l.), Men.978, Pk.77, Com.Adesp.15.25 D., 22.68 D., etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πρός

  • 9 δείλη

    δείλη, ἡ,
    A afternoon (

    δ. ἡμέρας τελευτή Pl.Def. 411b

    ),

    ἔσσεται ἢ ἠὼς ἢ δείλη ἢ μέσον ἦμαρ Il.21.111

    : divided into early and late ( πρωΐα and ὀψία)

    , περὶ δείλην πρωΐην γενομένην Hdt.8.6

     (opp. δ. ὀψίην, ib.9);

    δείλης ὀψίης Id.7.167

    , cf. D.57.9;

    περὶ δείλην ἤδη ὀψίαν Th.8.26

    ; later

    περὶ δ. ἑσπέραν Ph.2.533

    , Hdn.3.12.7.
    II δ. alone,
    1 early afternoon,

    δείλῃ δὲ τέμνεται ὀπώρα S.Fr. 255

    ;

    ἤδη ἦν μέσον ἡμέρας.., ἡνίκα δὲ δείλη ἐγένετο X.An.1.8.8

    ; ἀμφὶ δείλην ib.2.2.14 (opp. ὀψέ, ib.16);

    περὶ δείλην Hdt.9.101

    , Th.4.69, 103; ἀπὸ δείλης from the hour of afternoon, Arist.HA 564a19;

    τῆς δείλης

     in the course of the afternoon,

    X.An.7.3.10

    ; but also,
    b late afternoon, τῆς ἡμέρας ὅλης διῆλθον.. ἀλλὰ δείλης ἀφίκοντο ib.3.3.11; ἡνίκα ἦν δ., opp. τῆς νυκτός, ib.3.4.34, cf.4.2.1,7.2.16;

    μέχρι δείλης ἐξ ἑωθινοῦ Id.HG1.1.5

    , cf. 4.1.22;

    ἀπ' ἠοῦς μέχρι δείλης Pl.Def. 411a

    ; ἕωθεν καὶ δείλης early in the morning and late in the evening, Arist.Fr. 531;

    πρὸς τὴν δείλην Id.HA 596a23

    ; δείλαν alone, Theoc.10.5.
    2 in late Prose, any time of day, περὶ μεσημβρίαν δ. about mid-day, Ach.Tat.3.2.
    b apparently, day, opp. night, δείλ (η) ς ἐργ ([etym.] άταις) PLond.1.131r44 (ii A.D.), cf. 244.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > δείλη

  • 10 ἀνά

    ἀνά [ ᾰνᾰ], [dialect] Aeol., Thess., Arc., Cypr. [full] ὀν, Prep. governing gen., dat., and acc. By apocope ἀνά becomes ἄν before dentals, as ἂν τὸν ὀδελόν; ἄγ before gutturals, as ἂγ γύαλα; ἄμ before labials, as ἂμ βωμοῖσι, ἂμ πέτραις, etc.;
    A

    ἀμπεπλεγμένας IG5(2).514.10

     (Arc.).
    A WITH GEN., three times in Od., in phrase ἀνὰ νηὸς βαίνειν go on board ship, 2.416, 9.177, 15.284; ἂν τοῦ τοίχου, τᾶς ὁδοῦ, τοῦ ῥοειδίου, IG14.352i40, ii 15,83 ([place name] Halaesa).
    B WITH DAT., on, upon, without any notion of motion, [dialect] Ep., Lyr., and Trag. (only lyr.), ἀνὰ σκήπτρῳ upon the sceptre, Il.1.15, Pi.P. 1.6;

    ἂμ βωμοῖσι Il.8.441

    ;

    ἀνὰ σκολόπεσσι 18.177

    ;

    ἀνὰ Γαργάρῳ ἄκρῳ 15.152

    ; ἀνὰ ὤμῳ upon the shoulder, Od.11.128; ἀν ἵπποις, i. e. in a chariot, Pi.O.1.41;

    ἂμ πέτραις A.Supp. 351

     (lyr.);

    ἀνά τε ναυσὶν καὶ σὺν ὅπλοις E.IA 754

    ;

    ἂγ Κόσσῳ GDI1365

     ([place name] Epirus).
    C WITH ACCUS., the comm. usage, implying motion upwards:
    I of Place, up, from bottom to top, up along,

    κίον' ἀν' ὑψηλὴν ἐρύσαι Od.22.176

    ; ἀνὰ μέλαθρον up to, ib. 239; [

    φλὲψ] ἀνὰ νῶτα θέουσα διαμπερὲς αὐχέν' ἱκάνει Il.13.547

    ;

    ἀνὰ τὸν ποταμόν Hdt.2.96

    ; ἂν ῥόον up-stream, GDI5016.11 ([place name] Gortyn);

    κρῆς ἂν τὸν ὀδελὸν ἐμπεπαρμένον Ar.Ach. 796

     ([place name] Megarian); simply, along,

    ἂν τὼς ὄρως Tab.Heracl.2.32

    .
    2 up and down, throughout,

    ἀνὰ δῶμα Il.1.570

    ; ἀνὰ στρατόν, ἄστυ, ὅμιλον, ib. 384, Od.8.173, etc.;

    ἂγ γύαλα A.Supp. 550

     (lyr.); ἀνὰ πᾶσαν τὴν Μηδικήν, ἀνὰ τὴν Ἑλλάδα, Hdt.1.96, 2.135, etc.;

    ὀν τὸ μέσσον Alc. 18.3

    ; ἀνὰ τὸ σκοτεινόν in the darkness, Th.3.22.
    3 metaph., ἀνὰ θυμὸν φρονέειν, ἀνὰ στόμα ἔχειν, to have continually in the mind, in the mouth, Il.2.36, 250; ἀν' Αἰγυπτίους ἄνδρας among them, Od.14.286; ἀνὰ πρώτους εἶναι to be among the first, Hdt.9.86.
    II of Time, throughout, ἀνὰ νύκτα all night through, Il.14.80;

    ἀνὰ τὰς προτέρας ἡμέρας Hdt.7.223

    ;

    ἀνὰ τὸν πόλεμον 8.123

    ; ἀνὰ χρόνον in course of time, 1.173, 2.151, 5.27; ἀνὰ μέσσαν ἀκτῖνα (i. e. in the south) S.OC 1247.
    2 distributively, ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέραν day by day, Hdt.2.37, 130, etc.;

    ἀνὰ πᾶν ἔτος 1.136

    , etc.;

    ἀνὰ πάντα ἔτεα 8.65

    : also ἀνὰ πρεσβύτᾱτα in order of age, Test.Epict.4.28.
    III distributively with Numerals,

    κρέα εἴκοσιν ἀν' ἡμιωβολιαῖα 20

     pieces of meat at half an obol each, Ar.Ra. 554; τῶν ἀν' ὀκτὼ τὠβολοῦ that sell 8 for the obol, Timocl. 18; ἀνὰ πέντε παρασάγγας τῆς ἡμέρας [they marched] at the rate of 5 parasangs a day, X.An.4.6.4; ἔστησαν ἀνὰ ἑκατόν μάλιστα ὥσπερ χοροί they stood in bodies of about 100 men each. ib.5.4.12; κλισίας ἀνὰ πεντήκοντα companies at the rate of 50 in each, Ev.Luc.9.14; ἔλαβον ἀνὰ δηνάριον a denarius apiece, Ev. Matt.20.10; in doctor's prescriptions,

    ἀνὰ ὀβολὼ β Sor.1.63

    , etc.: also

    ἀνὰ δύο ἥμισυ ζῳδίων

     amounting to

    2

     1/2 signs, Autol.1.10; multiplied by, PPetr.3p.198.
    IV Phrases: ἀνὰ κράτος up to the full strength, i. e. vigorously, ἀνὰ κράτος φεύγειν, ἀπομάχεσθαι, X.Cyr.4.2.30, 5.3.12; ἀνὰ τὸν αὐτὸν λόγον and

    ἀνὰ λόγον

     proportionately,

    Pl.Phd. 110d

    ; esp. in math. sense, Id.Ti. 37a, Arist.APo. 85a38, etc.; ἀνὰ μέσον in the midst, Antiph.13, Men.531.19;

    ἀνὰ μέρος

     by turns,

    Arist.Pol. 1287n17

    .
    D WITH NOM. of Numerals, etc., distributively, Apoc.21.21, v. l. in Sor.1.11, 12, cf. Orib.Fr.50,54.
    E WITHOUT CASE as Adv., thereupon, Hom. and other Poets:— and with the notion of spreading all over a space, throughout, all over, μέλανες δ' ἀνὰ βότρυες ἦσαν all over there were clusters, Il.18.562, cf. Od.24.343:—but ἀνά often looks like an Adv. in Hom., where really it is only parted from its Verb by tmesis, ἀνὰ δ' ἔσχετο; ἀνὰ δ' ὦρτο (for ἀνῶρτο δέ) ; ἀνὰ τεύχε' ἀείρας (for τεύχεα ἀναείρας), etc.
    1 as in C. 1, up to, upwards, up, opp. κατά, as ἀνα-βαίνω, -βλέπω, ἀν-αιρέω, -ίστημι: poet. sts. doubled,

    ἀν' ὀρσοθύρην ἀναβαίνειν Od.22.132

    .
    2 hence flows the sense of increase or strengthening, as in ἀνακρίνω; though it cannot always be translated, as in Homer's ἀνείρομαι:—in this case opp. ὑπό.
    3 from the notion throughout (E), comes that of repetition and improvement, as in ἀνα-βλαστάνω, -βιόω, -γεννάω.
    4 the notion of back, backwards, in ἀναχωρέω, ἀνανεύω, etc., seems to come from such phrases as ἀνὰ ῥόον up, i. e. against, the stream.
    G ἄνα, written with anastr. as Adv., up! arise!

    ἀλλ' ἄνα Il.6.331

    , Od.18.13:—in this sense the ult. is never elided; cf.

    ἀλλ' ἄνα, εἰ μέμονάς γε Il.9.247

    ;

    ἀλλ' ἄνα ἐξ ἑδράνων S.Aj. 194

    .
    2 apocop. ἄν after ὤρνυτο, ὦρτο, and up stood.. arose, Il.3.268, 23.837, etc.
    3 when used as Prep. ἀνά never suffers anastrophe.
    ------------------------------------
    ἄνα (B), ἡ,
    A = ἄνυσις, Alcm.23.83, Call.Jov.90; cf. ἄνη.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἀνά

  • 11 δεύτερος

    δεύτερος, α, ον,
    A second, (perh. from δύο with [comp] Comp. termination):
    I next in Order (with a notion of Time), in Il. (not in Od.) of one who comes in second in a race, 23.265;

    δ. ἐλθεῖν 22.207

    ;

    δ. αὖτ'.. προΐει.. ἔγχος

     next,

    20.273

    , etc.; οὔ μ' ἔτι δ. ὧδε ἵξετ' ἄχος no second grief, i.e. none hereafter like this, 23.46; as [comp] Comp., c. gen., ἐμεῖο δεύτεροι after my time, ib. 248; σοὶ δ' οὐκέτι δ. ἔσται no second choice will be allowed thee, Hes.Op.34; in [dialect] Att. and Trag. with Art.,

    ὁ δ. S.OC 1315

    , etc.; αἱ δ. πως φροντίδες σοφώτεραι second thoughts are wisest, E.Hipp. 436: prov., δ. πλοῦς the next best way, Pl.Phd. 99d, etc.;

    ὁ δ. πλοῦς ἐστι δήπου λεγόμενος, ἂν ἀποτύχῃ τις οὐρίου, κώπαισι πλεῖν Men.241

    .
    2 of Time, next, later, δ. χρόνῳ in after time, Pi.O.1.43; δ. ἡμέρῃ on the next day, Hdt.1.82; δ. ἔτεϊ τούτων in the year after this, Id.6.46: neut. as Adv., δεύτερον αὖ, αὖτε, αὖτις, a second time, Il.3.332, 191, Od.9.354;

    ἐν τᾷ δ. ἐκκλησίᾳ SIG644.20

    : with the Art.,

    τὸ δ. Sapph.Supp.4.11

    , Hdt.1.79, A.Ag. 1082, X.Cyr.2.2.1: also pl., Hdt.3.53, 9.3; τὰ δ. κινδυνεύσοντας about to run the next dangers, Th.6.78; later, ἐκ δευτέρου for the second time, Ev.Marc.14.72, Dsc.5.87.10;

    ἐκ δευτέρης Babr. 114.5

    , cf. PStrassb.100.22 (ii B. C.): regul. Adv.

    δευτέρως Pl.Lg. 955e

    , Sallust.18, etc.
    b ὁ δ. the younger, BGU592.10 (ii A. D.).
    II in Order or Rank (without any notion of Time), second,

    δ.μετ' ἐκεῖνον Hdt.1.31

    , cf. S.Ph. 1442, etc.;

    πολὺ δ. Id.OC 1228

     (lyr.); πολὺ δ. μετά τι very much behind, Th.2.97;

    μετὰ τὸ πλουτεῖν δ. Antiph.144.9

    : c. gen., δ. οὐδενός second to none, Hdt.1.23, Plb.31.27.16;

    δ. παιδὸς σῆς E.Tr. 618

    ;

    πάντα τἄλλα δεύτερ' ἦν τῶν προσδοκιῶν D.19.24

    ;

    πρὸς τὰ χρήματα θνητοῖσι τἄλλα δεύτερ' S.Fr.354.5

    ;

    τὰ ἄλλα πάντα δ. τε καὶ ὕστερα λεκτέον Pl.Phlb. 59c

    ; logically or metaphysically posterior,

    πᾶν πλῆθος δ. ἐστι τοῦ ἑνός Procl.Inst.5

    , cf. 36, Dam.Pr. 126, al.; δεύτερ' ἡγεῖσθαι think quite secondary, S.OC 351; δεύτερον ἄγειν, δεύτερα ποιεῖσθαι, Luc.Symp.9, Plu.2.162e;

    ἐν δευτέρῳ τίθεσθαι Id.Fab.24

    , cf. Jul.Or.8.242b; ἱερὸν δ. of the second class, OGI56.59 (iii B. C.), etc.
    2 the second of two, δ. αὐτή herself with another, Hdt.4.113, cf. AB89; ἑπτὰ δ. σοφοί a second seven sages, Euphro 1.12; εἷς καὶ δ. unus et alter, Hdn.Gr.2.934;

    εἷς ἢ δ. Jul.Or.6.190d

    ;

    ἕν τι.. ἢ δεύτερον D.Chr.33.7

    ; δ. καὶ τρίτος two or three, Plb.26.1.1.; neut. as Adv., ἅπαξ καὶ δεύτερον once or twice, Jul. ad Ath.278c.
    3 δ. ἀριθμός number whose prime factors are odd, Nicom.Ar.1.12.
    III as Subst., τὰ δ., = δευτερεῖα, the second prize or place, Il.23.538;

    τὰ δ. φέρεσθαι Hdt.8.104

    .
    2 after-birth, Dsc.1.48,50.
    3 δευτέρα σαββάτου (sc. ἡμέρα) second day of the week, LXXPs. 47(48) tit.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > δεύτερος

  • 12 δρόμος

    δρόμος, ὁ, ([etym.] δραμεῖν)
    A course, race, in Il.mostly of horses,

    ἵπποισι τάθη δρόμος 23.375

    ; also of men, τέτατο δρόμος ib. 758; οὐρίῳ δρόμῳ with prosperous course, S.Aj. 889 (lyr.); ἅπαντι χρῆσθαι τῷ δρόμῳ at full speed, Luc.Dom.10: of any quick movement, e. g. flight, A.Pers. 207: of Time, ἡμέρης δ. a day's running, i. e. the distance one can go in a day, Hdt.2.5;

    κατανύσαι τὸν προκείμενον δ. Id.8.98

    ;

    ἵππου δ. ἡμέρας D.19.273

    : of Things, δ. νεφέλης, ἡλίου τε καὶ σελήνης, E.Ph. 163, Pl. Ax. 370b (pl.), etc.;

    οἱ δ. τῶν ἀστέρων Procl.Par.Ptol. 136

    ; δρόμῳ at a run, freq. with Verbs of motion,

    δρόμῳ διαβάντας τὸν Ἀσωπόν Hdt.9.59

    ;

    ἰέναι Id.3.77

    ;

    χρῆσθαι Id.6.112

    ;

    χωρεῖν Th.4.31

    ;

    δ. ξυνῆψαν E. Ph. 1101

    ;

    βοηθῆσαι δ. Ar.Fr. 551

    : in pl.,

    δρόμοις A.Pr. 838

    , Supp. 819.
    2 foot-race, as a contest, IG2.594.11, al.: prov., περὶ τοῦ παντὸς δρόμον (- μου codd.) θεῖν to run for one's life, Hdt.8.74;

    τὸν περὶ ψυχῆς δρόμον δραμεῖν Ar.V. 375

    ;

    περὶ ψυχῆς ὁ δ. Pl.Tht. 173a

    : generally, contest, πλαγᾶν δρόμος, i. e. a pugilistic contest, Pi.I.5(4).60.
    3 lap in a race, S.El. 726 (interpol. ib. 691);

    ἐν τῷ δευτέρῳ δ. Arist.HA 579a8

    .
    4 in speaking, rapid delivery, Longin.Rh.p.312S.
    II place for running, δρόμοι εὐρέες runs for cattle, Od.4.605.
    2 racecourse, Hdt.6.126, E.Andr. 599.
    3 public walk,

    ἐν εὐσκίοις δ. Ἀκαδήμου Eup.32

    , cf. IG22.1126.36, etc.; colonnade, Pl.Tht. 144c;

    κατάστεγος δ.

     cloister,

    Id.Euthd. 273a

    ;

    δ. ξυστός Aristias 5

    ; in Crete, = γυμνάσιον, Suid., cf. SIG463.14 (Itanos, iii B. C.); δὔ ἢ τρεῖς δρόμους περιεληλυθότε having taken two or three turns in the cloister, Pl.Euthd. l. c.; in Egypt, avenue of Sphinxes at entrance of temples, OGI56.52 (Canopus, Ptol. III), Str.17.1.28, etc.;

    δ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ BGU 1130.10

     (i B. C.).
    4 orchestra in the theatre ([dialect] Tarent.), Hsch.
    5 metaph., ἔξω δρόμου or ἐκτὸς δρόμου φέρεσθαι get off the course, i. e. wander from the point, A.Pr. 883 (anap.), Pl.Cra. 414b;

    ἐκ δρόμου πεσεῖν A.Ag. 1245

    ; οὐδέν ἐστ' ἔξω δρόμου 'tis not foreign to the purpose, Id.Ch. 514.
    III δ. δημόσιος, = Lat. cursus publicus, Procop. Vand.1.16, Arc.30, Lyd.Mag.2.10; δ. ὀξύς, = Lat. cursus velox, ib.3.61, POxy.900.7 (iv A. D.), etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > δρόμος

  • 13 νῦν

    νῦν (for [full] νυν, [full] νυ, v. infr. II), Adv.
    A now, both of the present moment, and of the present time generally, οἳ ν. βροτοί εἰσιν mortals of our day, Il.1.272 ; so in [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Att., οἱ ν. [ἄνθρωποι] men of the present day, Hdt.1.68 ;

    οἵ γε ν. Pi.O.1.105

    , B.5.4, cf. Arist.Metaph. 1069a26 ; ὁ ν. τρόπος, τὸ ν. βαρβαρικόν, Th.1.6 ; Βοιωτοὶ οἱ ν. ib.12 ;

    ὁ ν. παρὼν χρόνος S.Tr. 174

    , al., Pl.Prm. 141e ;

    ἡμέρα ἡ ν. S.OT 351

     ;

    νὺξ ἡ ν. Id.Ant.16

     ;

    ἡ ν. ὁδός Id.El. 1295

     ;

    τὸ ν.

     the present,

    Arist.Ph. 218a6

    , al. ;

    ἀπὸ τοῦ ν. Pl.Prm. 152c

    , LXXGe.46.30, etc. ;

    ἀπὸ ν. AP5.40

     (Rufin.) ;

    ἕως τοῦ ν. LXXGe.46.34

     ; μέχρι ν. (v.l. μ. τοῦ ν.) D.S.17.110 ; τὰ ν. simply, = ν., Hdt.7.104, E.Heracl. 641, etc. ;

    τό περ ν. Pi. N.7.101

     ;

    τὰ δὲ ν. S.OC 133

     (lyr.) ;

    τὸ ν. εἶναι Pl.R. 506e

    , X.Cyr.5.3.42, Arist.Ath.31.2 ;

    τὸ ν. ἔχον Act.Ap.24.25

    .
    2 of the immediate past, just now, but now,

    ν. Μενέλαος ἐνίκησεν Il.3.439

    , cf. 13.772, Od. 1.43, S.OC84, X.Cyr.4.5.48 ;

    ν. γοῦν ἐπεχείρησας Pl.R. 341c

     ;

    ἡλίκα ν. ἐτραγῴδει D.18.13

    .
    3 of the future, presently,

    ν. αὖτ' ἐγχείῃ πειρήσομαι Il.5.279

    , cf. 20.307, Od.1.200 ;

    ν. φεύξομαι, τόθ' ἁγνὸς ὤν E.El. 975

     ; cf. νῦν δή, νυνί.
    4 sts. opp. to what might have been under other circumstances, as it is (or was), as the case stands (or stood), as a matter offact,

    ν. δ' ὁ μὲν ὣς ἀπόλωλε Od.1.166

     ;

    εἰ μὲν ὑπώπτευον, οὐκ ἂν.. ἐποιούμην· ν. δὲ κτλ. Th.4.126

    , cf. 1.122, 3.113, Pl. Cra. 384b, D.18.195, etc. ; καὶ ν. even so, X.An.7.4.24,7.7.17.
    5 coupled with other Particles,

    τὰ ν. γε S.Ph. 245

    , etc. ;

    ν. γε μάν Pi. P.1.50

     ; ν. δή, v. h. v. : with other expressions of Time, ν... σήμερον, ν. ἡμέρη ἥδε, Il.7.29, 13.828 ;

    ν. ἤδη

     henceforth,

    S.Ant. 801

     (anap.), etc. ;

    ν... ἄρτι

     but now,

    Pl.Cra. 396c

    .
    II enclit. (but see below) νυν, νυ. [νυ only [dialect] Ep., [dialect] Boeot., and Cypr. (also Arc. in ὅνυ, q. v.) ; νῠν twice in Hom., Il.10.105, 23.485 : ῡ?νῦνX in Trag. ([pron. full] ῡ A.Th. 242, 246, S.Ant. 705, E.Or. 1678, etc. ; [pron. full] ῠ S.Tr.92, E.Andr.91, etc.), [pron. full] ῡ in Com. (Ar.V. 1381, Pl. 975, al.), exc. Cratin.144, Ar.Th. 105 (lyr., citing Agatho), and perh. Nu.141 ; both quantities in τοίνυν, q.v.]
    1 rarely of Time, now, perh. so used in Il.10.105, cf. Parm.19.1, Pi. P.11.44, al., Epich.170.6.
    2 in [dialect] Ep. mostly as a particle of emphasis,

    ἧκε δ' ἐπ' Ἀργείοισι κακὸν βέλος· οἱ δέ νυ λαοὶ θνῇσκον Il.1.382

    , etc.: freq. coupled with other Particles or Conjs.,

    ἦ ῥά ν. 4.93

     ;

    καί νύ κεν 3.373

     ; οὔ ν., μή νύ τοι, 10.165, 1.28 ; ἐπεί νύ τοι ib. 416 ;

    ὥς νύ περ 2.258

    .
    3 in commands or entreaties,

    μή ν. μοι νεμεσήσετ' 15.115

     : freq. with other Advbs., δεῦρό ν. come now ! 23.485 ;

    ἐνταῦθά ν. ὕβριζε A.Pr.82

    , cf. Ar.Th. 1001, V. 149, Pl. 724 ;

    εἶά ν. Id. Pax 467

    , V. 430, Pl. 316 : freq. with imper., φέρε ν. ib. 789 ;

    ἄγε ν. Id. Pax 1056

    , V. 381 ;

    σπεῦδέ ν. Id.Pl. 414

     ;

    σίγαν. S.Aj.87

    , Cratin.l.c. ;

    περίδου ν. Ar.Nu. 644

    , cf. X.Cyr.5.3.21, etc. ;

    ὕφαινέ ν. B.18.8

     ; so in [dialect] Boeot.,

    ν. ἔνθω IG7.3172.88

     (Orchom.) ; also in Cypr. with opt. in commands, δυϝάνοι ν., δώκοι ν., Inscr.Cypr.135.6,16 H. ([place name] Idalion).
    4 in questions, τίς ν. ; τί ν. ; who, what, why now? Il.5.373, 1.414,4.31 ; ἦ νυ.. ; Od.6.125. [In signf. I always perispom. In signf. II perispom. exc. when short, Hdn.Gr.2.39, al. ; enclit. when short, sts. in codd., as Il.23.485 (Pap. in AJP21.304, etc. ; oxyt. when = δή, Tyrannioap.Hdn.Gr.2.27 ; καθ' ὁμαλισμόν or κατ' ἔγκλισιν when=δή, Sch.Ar.Pl. 414, Sch.A.R.1.664). In codd. usu. perispom. in both senses, A.Pr.82, Th. 242, 246, S.Ant. 705,El. 324, Ar.Pl. 414, V. 758, 922, etc. ; even νῠν is written νῦν in codd. vett. Pi. passim, also in S.Aj.87, Tr.92, etc. ; hence νυν may freq. be restored where the sense requires it. The accent of τοίνῡ?νῦνXν perh. shows that both νῠν and νῡν could be enclitic.—Position: in signf. I νῦν can occupy any position ; in signf. II it prefers (like other enclitics, but also like ἄν, δέ, γάρ, etc.) the second place in the sentence, e.g.

    πρός νύν σε πατρός S.Ph. 468

    , cf. OC 1333 ;

    ἀπό νύν με λείπετ' ἤδη Id.Ph. 1177

     (lyr.) ;

    μετά νυν δός E.Supp.56

     (lyr.) ; νυ (always enclitic) precedes other enclitics and allows only δέ to precede.] (Cf. Skt. nú, n[umacracute], nūnám, OE. nū 'now', etc.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > νῦν

  • 14 πότε

    πότε, [dialect] Ion. [full] κότε, [dialect] Dor. [full] πόκα Theoc.4.7, al.:—interrog. Particle used in direct and indirect questions,
    A when? at what time? Il.19.227, Od.4.642;

    πότ' εἰ μὴ νῦν..; A.Th. 101

     (lyr.), cf. Ch. 394 (lyr.); πότ' ἆρα; = πότε with

    ἆρα 1.4

     or 11, E. Ion 563;

    πότε δή; A.Ch. 720

     (lyr.);

    ἐς πότε λήξει; S.Aj. 1185

     (lyr.);

    ἐκ πότε.. ἤρξασθε SIG832.9

     (Astypalaea, ii A. D.).
    II indef. [full] ποτε ([dialect] Att., also Arc. in

    οὔποτε IG5(2).343.48

    ,66 (Orchom., iv B. C.), οὔτε ποτέ Tab.Defix. in Philol. 59.201, and Cypr. in

    μήποτε Inscr.Cypr.144H.

    ), [dialect] Ion. [full] κοτε, [dialect] Dor. [full] ποκα, [dialect] Aeol. [full] ποτα Sapph.1.5, enclit. Particle:
    1 at some time or other, at some time,

    τάχ' ἄν ποτε θυμὸν ὀλέσσῃ Il.1.205

    , cf. Od. 2.76, etc.; π. καὶ ἄλλοτε at certain other times, X.An.6.4.12, Arist. Po. 1451a9, Luc.Herm.24.
    2 in hypoth. clauses, questions, etc., at any time, ever, S.Aj. 755, 1133;

    εἴ κοτε Call.Aet.Oxy.2080.69

    ; cf. εἴ ποτε: also with relatives (cf. δήποτε)

    , Ζεὺς ὅστις ποτ' ἐστίν A.Ag. 160

     (lyr.), etc.; ὅποι ποτέ, ὅπου π., etc., S.Ph. 780, Aj. 194 (lyr.), etc.; after πω, πη, v. πώποτε, πήποκα: very freq. with negatives, οὔτε ποτ' .. Il.1.226;

    οὐδέ ποτ' Hes.Th. 759

    ;

    οὐδέν ποτ' ἄλλο A.Ch.16

    ;

    οὐδεὶς ἐρεῖ ποθ' S.Aj. 481

    ;

    οὐκ ἂν δή ποτε Il.19.271

    , etc.;

    τοῦτο μὴ δόξῃς ποτέ S.Ant. 762

    , cf. 648, 750, etc.; cf. οὔποτε, μήποτε, οὐδέποτε, μηδέποτε, οὐπώποτε, μηπώποτε.
    3 in correl. clauses it stands first, with accent,

    ποτὲ μὲν.., ποτὲ δὲ..

     at one time.., at another..,

    Pl. Tht. 170c

     (s. v. l.), Plb.4.38.6, etc.;

    ποτὲ μὲν.., αὖθις δὲ.. Pl.R. 560a

    ;

    ποτὲ.., τοτὲ δ' οὔ Id.Tht. 192d

    ;

    ποτ' εἶχε.., εἶτά γε νῦν D.36.50

    ;

    ποτὲ μὲν.. νῦν δέ Luc.DMort.11.1

    ; ποτὲ δὲ.., without any preceding Part., Thphr.Char.9.7 (dub.).
    III of some unknown point of time,
    1 in ref. to the past, once,

    ὅν ποτ' Ἀθήνη θρέψε Il.2.547

    , etc.; οὕς ποτ' ἀπ' Αἰνείαν ἑλόμην, of the day before, 8.108 (v. Sch.), cf. 14.45;

    ἤδη π. 1.260

    , S.Aj. 1142, Ar.Nu. 346, Ra. 931;

    ποτ' ἤδη A.Eu.50

    ;

    πρόσθε πού ποτ' S.OC 1549

    ;

    χρόνῳ ποτ' Id.Ant. 303

    ; esp. in telling a story, once upon a time,

    οὕτω ποτ' ἦν μῦς καὶ γαλῆ Ar.V. 1182

    , cf. Pl. Phdr. 237b: with historic [tense] pres., S.OT 715, E.El. 416, Ba.2: with a Subst.,

    εἰς τήν π. φιλίαν And.3.22

    ;

    τυράννου.. πάλαι π. S.OT 1043

    , cf.Ph. 677 (lyr.), Tr. 555.
    b at length,

    μόγις δή κοτε εἶπε Hdt.1.116

    ;

    μόγις οὖν π. Pl.Prt. 314e

    , etc.;

    ὀψὲ γοῦν π. Hierocl. in CA27p.484M.

    2 in ref. to the future, at some time,

    καί π. τοι.. παρέσσεται.. δῶρα Il.1.213

    , cf. 240, S.OC 386, Ant. 912, etc.: also to denote earnest expectation, at length,

    εὔχεταί π. οἶκον ἰδεῖν Pi.P.4.293

    ;

    ἔμελλον ἄρα παύσειν π. Ar.Ra. 268

    ; esp. with imper.,

    μέθες π.

     dimitte tandem aliquando,

    S.Ph. 816

    ; τείσασθ', ἀλλὰ τῷ χρόνῳ π. ib. 1041, etc.;

    ὀψέ π. Jul.Or.1.31d

    .
    3 with intensive force, in questions, τίς ποτε; who in the world?

    τίνες ποτ' ἐστέ; A.Eu. 408

    , cf. S.Ph. 220, etc.; τί ποτ' ἐστὶ τοῦτο τὸ πάθος what it can possibly be, Pl.Tht. 187d;

    οὐκ ἐξερεῖς ποτε; S.OT 335

    , cf. 754, Aj. 1290, etc.; to strengthen ἀεί, ἀεί ποτε from all time, always in the past,

    ἀεί ποτε ζῇ ταῦτα Id.Ant. 456

    , cf. Aj. 320, Th.6.82, al., D.C.42.5;

    ἀεὶ δή π. Th.1.13

    , 8.73.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > πότε

  • 15 ἄλλος

    ἄλλος, η, ο, Cypr.[full] αἶλος Inscr.Cypr.135 H. ([place name] Idalion): (from ἀλ
    A yος, cf. Lat. alius):— another, i. e. one besides what has been mentioned, either Adj. or Pron.: when Adj., its Subst. is either in the same case, or in gen.,

    Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476

    ;

    θεῶν ἄ. 16.446

    :—ἄ. μέν.. ἄ. δέ .. one.. another.., more rarely the one.. the other.. (of two persons, etc.), Il.22.493, etc.; τὰ μέν.. ἄλλα δέ .. Il.6.147, and [dialect] Att.; ἕτερον μέν.. ἄλλον δέ .. Il.9.313; ἄλλο μέν.. ἑτέρου δέ .. Hdt.1.32;

    θάτερον.. τὸ δ' ἄλλο E.IT 962

    .
    II with τις, any other,

    οὐδέ τις ἄ. ἔγνω ἀλλ' ἄρα Κασσάνδρη Il.24.697

    ;

    ἄ. τις Hdt. 3.85

    ; οὐδεὶς ἄ. no other, ibid.;

    ἄλλα πολλά Il.9.639

    ;

    πολλὰ καὶ ἄλλα Th.3.56

    ; for

    εἴ τις ἄλλος Id.6.32

    , etc., and

    εἴ τις καὶ ἄ. X.An.1.4.15

    , etc., v. εἰ.
    2 freq. with another of its own cases or derived Adverbs, ἄ. ἄλλα λέγει one man says one thing, one another, X.An.2.1.15;

    ἄ. ἄλλω' ἔλεγεν Pl.Smp. 220c

    ;

    ἄ. ἄλλῃ ἐτράπετο X.An. 4.8.19

    ; v. ἄλλοθεν, ἄλλοσε, ἄλλοτε; also with Verb in pl.,

    παραλαμβάνων ἄ. ἄλλον ἐπ' ἄλλου, τὸν δ' ἐπ' ἄλλου χρείᾳ.. ἐθέμεθα πόλιν ὄνομα Pl.R. 369c

    , cf. X.Cyr.2.1.4, etc.: pl., ἄλλοι when the several parties are pl.,

    λείπουσι τὸν λόφον.. ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν X.An.1.10.13

    .
    3 ἄ. καὶ ἄ., one and then another, one or two, X.An.1.5.12; ἄλλο καὶ ἄλλο one thing after another, Id.Cyr.4.1.15; πρὸς ἄλλὡ καὶ ἄλλὡ σημείὡ to different points, Euc.1.7.
    4 repeated for emphasis, ἄ. ἄ. τρόπος quite another sort, E.Ph. 132.
    5 οὐδ' ἄ. for οὐδέτερος, Theoc.6.45.
    6 with Art., ὁ ἄλλος, the rest, all besides; in pl., οἱ ἄλλοι ([dialect] Ion. [var] contr. ὧλλοι) all the others, the rest, freq. from Hom. downwards ( ἄλλοι in same signf., Il.2.1); τὰ ἄλλα, [var] contr. τἆλλα, all else,

    τἆλλα πλὴν ὁ χρυσός Scol. 1

     (Pytherm.); in [dialect] Att. freq. as Adv., for the rest, esp. in amendments to decrees, τὰ μὲν ἄλλα καθάπερ ὁ δεῖνα κτλ. IG1.27a70, etc.: of Time, = τὸν ἄλλον χρόνον, X.HG3.2.2; ὁ ἄ. χρόνος, = ὁ λοιπὸς χρόνος, of the future, Lys. 14.4 (but also of the past, D.20.16); τῇ ἄλλῃ ἡμέρᾳ, τῷ ἄλλῳ ἔτει, next day, next year, X.HG1.1.13, 1.2.1; οἵτε ἄλλοι καί .. all others and especially..,

    γυναῖκας ἄλλας τε πολλὰς καὶ δὴκαὶ βασιλέος θυγατέρα Hdt.1.1

    , etc.; ἄλλα τε δὴ εἶπε, καί .. Pl.Tht. 142c; (v.

    ἄλλως 1

    ):— τὸ ἄλλο is much less freq. than τὰ ἄλλα.
    7 with Numerals, yet, still, further,

    τρίτον ἄ. γένος Hes.Op. 143

    ; πέμπτος ποταμὸς ἄ. yet a fifth river, Hdt.4.54, cf. A.Th. 486, S.Ant. 1295, etc.
    8 in enumerations, as well, besides, ἅμα τῇγε καὶ ἀμφίπολοι κίον ἄλλαι with her their mistress came attendants also, Od.6.84;

    μήτηρ ἠδὲ πατὴρ ἠδ' ἄλλοι πάντες ἑταῖροι 9.367

    ; οὐ γὰρ ἦν χόρτος οὐδὲ ἄ. δένδρον οὐδέν there was no grass nor any tree at all, X.An.1.5.5;

    πολιτῶν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ξένων Pl.Grg. 473d

    ; προσοφλὼν οὐ τὴν ἐπωβελίαν μόνον ἀλλὰ καὶ ἄλλην ὕβριν besides, Aeschin.1.163:—pleonastic,

    παρ' ἀγγέλων ἄλλων ἀκούειν S.OT7

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.6.2;

    ἰδὼν ἐς πλησίον ἄλλον Il.4.81

    ;

    γυναικῶν τῶν ἄλλων μία E.Med. 945

    ;

    μόνη τῶν ἄλλων ἐπιστημῶν Pl.Chrm. 166e

    ; with [comp] Comp., freq. in Hom.,

    οὔτις σεῖο νεώτερος ἄ. Ἀχαιῶν Il.15.569

    , cf. 22.106, al.; with [comp] Sup.,

    ὀϊζυρώτατος ἄλλων Od. 5.105

    .
    III less freq., = ἀλλοῖος, of other sort, different, Il.13.64, 21.22;

    ἄ. γέγονεν Pl.Phdr. 241a

    .
    2 in this sense, c. gen., ἄλλα τῶν δικαίων other than just, X.Mem.4.4.25:—followed by ἤ .., with preceding neg., οὐδὲ ἄλλο.., οὐδὲν ἄλλο (or ἄλλο οὐδέν) .., ἤ .. nothing else than.., Hdt.1.49, 7.168, Th.4.14;

    οὐδὲν ἄλλο γ' ἤπτήξας A.Pers. 209

    ; ἃ μηδὲν ἄλλο ἢ διανεῖταί τις which one only thinks, Pl. Tht. 195e:—more freq. in questions, τίς ἄλλος ἢ 'γώ .. ; A.Pr. 440; τί δ' ἄλλογ' ἢπόνοι .. ; Id.Th. 852: ellipt., τί ἄλλο (sc. πάσχω ) ἢ ἱπποκένταυρος γίγνομαι; X.Cyr.4.3.20; τί ἄλλο (sc. ἐποίησαν) ἢ ἐπεβούλευσαν; Th.3.39:—followed by πλήν, S.Aj. 125, Ar.Ach.39; by Preps., πρό ..Hdt.3.85; ἀντί .. A.Pr. 467; παρά .. Pl.Phd. 80b, etc.: with neg., sts. followed by ἀλλά, Il.18.403, 21.275:—see also ἄλλο τι.
    3 other than what is, untrue, unreal, Od.4.348.
    4 other than right, wrong, bad, ἄλλου τινος ἡττῆσθαι yield to some unworthy motive, D. 21.218, cf. Plu.2.187d, etc.; cf. ἄλλως.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ἄλλος

  • 16 ὁ

    ὁ, [full] ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
    A demonstr. Pronoun.
    B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.
    C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual

    τοῖιν Od.18.34

    , al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ;

    οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404

     (anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ;

    τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11

     ;

    τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18

     ;

    τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e

     ;

    τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e

     ;

    τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75

     (τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484,

    ταῖν Lys.19.17

    , Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem.,

    μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8

     (Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. ὁ, ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With ὁ, ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)
    A ὁ, ἡ, τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):
    I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun,

    αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105

     ;

    τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186

    , cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.
    II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it,

    ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12

    , al.
    III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ;

    θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43

    , cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.
    IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.
    V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.
    VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,

    ὁ δέ

     the former,

    Pl.Prt. 359e

    , Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts,

    ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595

     ;

    τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d

    , etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition,

    ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28

    , cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ;

    πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c

     ; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg.,

    ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6

     : sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or

    ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317

    -19, cf. 116 ;

    τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.
    2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g.

    τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24

     ;

    τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b

     ;

    οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a

    , etc.
    3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which ὁ refers is left indefinite,

    ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41

     ;

    νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c

    , cf. Phlb. 13c.
    4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.
    5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding

    ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3

    , cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by

    ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304

     ; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ;

    τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843

    , etc. ;

    ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205

     (v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ;

    σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45

    , cf.

    μέν D.

     III ;

    γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d

    , cf. Tht. 181d.
    6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause,

    τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491

     ;

    τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3

    , cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87

     ;

    ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6

     : this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.
    7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.
    VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,
    1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v.

    ὅς A.

     II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc.,

    καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt.,

    καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61

    , al.
    2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such,

    τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b

     : but mostly in acc.,

    καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ;

    τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141

    , cf. 9.68 ;

    τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243

     ; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad,

    τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398

    , cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.;

    τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53

     ; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.
    VIII abs. usages of single cases,
    1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose,

    τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12

    .
    b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ;

    τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46

     ;

    δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210

     :—only poet.
    c of Manner,

    τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν

     in this way, thus,

    Od.8.510

    .
    d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without

    μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48

    .
    e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.
    2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose,

    τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d

    , Sph. 230b.
    b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.
    3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6),

    τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37

     ;

    τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89

     ; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.
    4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also

    τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14

     ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14

     ;

    τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90

     : sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause,

    τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107

    ,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.
    5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.
    b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.;

    ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32

    , cf. A.Eu. 462 ;

    τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59

    .
    6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs.,

    ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90

    , Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.;

    ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71

     ;

    τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c

     : in late Prose, also with Positives,

    ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47

     codd.; with

    πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19

    , cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).
    B ὁ, ἡ, τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,

    αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον

     the hindmost man,

    Il.11.178

     ;

    τὸν ἄριστον 17.80

     ;

    τὸν δύστηνον 22.59

     ;

    τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325

     ; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in

    τῶν ἄλλων 2.674

    , al.: with Advs.,

    τὸ πρίν 24.543

    , al.;

    τὸ πάρος περ 17.720

     ;

    τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583

     ; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ;

    τὰ πρῶτα 1.6

    ,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ;

    ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559

    .—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.
    I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron.,

    τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5

     ; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12;

    οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b

    .
    b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of ὁ with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).
    c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.
    d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.
    2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type,

    οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109

    ;

    πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242

    , etc.
    b freq. with abstract Nouns,

    ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45

    , etc.
    3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.
    4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.
    5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.;

    τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148

     ; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.
    6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ;

    τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b

     ;

    ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d

    , cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ;

    ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8

     ;

    τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8

     : hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.
    7 before Prons.,
    a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc.,

    τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a

    ,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ;

    τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a

     ; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.
    b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.
    c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,

    ὁ τοιοῦτος

     that sort of person,

    X.Mem.4.2.21

    , etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art.,

    τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13

    .
    8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    πολύς 11.3

    , etc.
    9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if ἤ follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.
    II elliptic expressions:
    1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.
    2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers.,

    τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48

    . But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as

    τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86

     ; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.
    3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.
    4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.
    5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as ὁ, ἡ, τὸ νῦν;

    ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52

     ; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as

    κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266

    , cf.[315] (lyr.);

    ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412

    (lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ;

    τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731

    .
    C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as

    κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262

    , cf. 1.300, al. ;

    Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526

    (lyr.);

    Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86

     ; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets,

    ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3

    , cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag.,

    τῆς S.OC 1258

    , Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.);

    τῷ S.Ph.14

     ;

    τήν Id.OC 747

    , Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg.

    τεῦ Il.18.192

    (s.v.l.).
    D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:
    a [dialect] Att. ὁ, ἡ, τό, with [pron. full] ᾰ make ᾱ, as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: ὁ, τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: ὁ, τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: ὁ, τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: ἡ before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before ἡ gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before ὑ gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.
    b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from

    ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65

    , ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from

    ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60

    , etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὁ

  • 17 ὕστερος

    A latter, last, [comp] Comp. and [comp] Sup. without any Posit. Adj. in use. (The Posit. must be looked for in Skt. úd 'up'; with ὕστερος, ὕστατος cf. Skt. [comp] Comp. and [comp] Sup. úttaras, uttamás 'higher, (later)', 'highest, (latest)'; cf. ὑστέρα.)
    A [full] ὕστερος, α, ον, latter:
    I of Place, coming after, behind,

    ὑστέρῳ ποδί E.Hipp. 1243

    , HF 1040; ὑστέρας ἔχων πώλους keeping them behind, S.El. 734;

    ὕ. λόχος X.Cyr.2.3.21

    ;

    ἐν τῷ ὑ. λόγῳ Antipho 6.14

    , cf. Pi.O.11(10).5, Pl.Grg. 503c, etc.; τὰ ὕ. the latter clauses, Plu.2.742d (s. v. l., δεύτερα Turnebus): c. gen., ὕστεροι ἡμῶν behind us, Pl.Ly. 206e, cf. Th.3.103; οὐδὲν ὑστέρα νεώς not a whit behind ( slower than) a ship, A.Eu. 251.
    II of Time, next,

    ὁ δ' ὕστερος ὄρνυτο χαλκῷ Il.5.17

    , 16.479; τῷ ὑ. ἔτει in the next year, X HG7.2.10;

    τῇ ὑ. Ὀλυμπιάδι Hdt.6.103

    ; ὑ. χρόνῳ in after time, Id.1.130, A.Ag. 702 (lyr.), etc.;

    ἐν ὑ. χρόνοις Pl.Lg. 865a

    ;

    ἐν ὑστέραισιν ἡμέραις A.Ag. 1666

     (troch.); δεκάτῃ ὑ. or ὑ. δεκάτῃ, on the [ per.] 21st day, Decr. ap. D.L.7.10, cf. Longin.Rh. p.192 H.: c. gen., later than, after,

    σεῦ ὕστερος εἶμ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν Il.18.333

    , cf. Ar.Ec. 859, Pl.Phd. 87c, al.:

    ὑ. χρόνῳ τούτων Hdt.4.166

    , 5.32, cf. Th.2.54.
    2 later, too late,

    ὕ. ἐλθών Il.18.320

    ;

    κἂν ὕ. ἔλθῃ Ar.V. 691

     (anap.);

    μῶν ὕστεραι πάρεσμεν; Id.Lys.69

    ;

    ὑ. ἀφικνεῖσθαι Th.4.90

    ; ὕ. (sc. ἐλθών) S.OT 222, Tr.92;

    Διονύσιος ὁ ὕ. D.

     the second, Arist.Pol. 1312a4.
    3 c. gen. rei, too late for,

    ὕστεροι ἀπικόμενοι τῆς συμβολῆς Hdt.6.120

    ;

    ὕ. ἐλθεῖν τοῦ σημείου Ar.V. 690

    (anap.);

    κακῶν ὕ. ἀφῖγμαι E.HF 1174

    ;

    ὕ. ἀφίκοντο τῆς μάχης μιᾷ ἡμέρᾳ Pl.Lg. 698e

    .
    4 as Subst.,

    οἱ ὕ.

     posterity,

    E. Supp. 1225

    ; ἄνδρες ὕ., ὕ. βροτοί, Id.Tr.13, 1245.
    III of inferiority in Age, Worth, or Quality, γένει ὕ., i.e. younger, Il.3.215; c. gen., οὐδενὸς ὕ. second to none, S.Ph. 181(lyr.), cf. Th.1.91;

    γυναικὸς ὕ. S. Ant. 746

    ; μηδ' ἔμπροσθεν τῶν νόμων, ἀλλ' ὕ. πολιτεύου not putting yourself above the laws, but below them, Aeschin.3.23; σῶμα δεύτερον καὶ ὕ (sc. ψυχῆς) Pl.Lg. 896c; νομίσας πάντα ὕστερα εἶναι τἆλλα πρός τι that all things were secondary to.., Th.8.41.
    2 logically posterior,

    ὁ τόπος ὕ. τῆς ὕλης Plot.2.4.12

    .
    IV Adv. ὑστέρως is found only in Eccl. writers, the ascription to Plato by Ammon. Diff.p.115V., Thom.Mag.p.284 R. being now corrected from Ptol. Ascal.p.405 H., where codd. have δευτέρως: the neut. ὕστερον was used, rarely of Place, behind,

    ὀπαδεῖν ὕ. A.Fr. 475

    ;

    ὕ. τῶν ἱππέων γίγνεσθαι X.Cyr.5.3.42

    .
    2 of Time, later, afterwards, parm.8.10, Hdt.6.91, etc.; also τὸ ὕ., opp. τὸ παλαιόν, Lycurg.61;

    ὕστερα Od.16.319

    ; freq. with other words,

    ὕ. αὖτις Il.1.27

    ;

    οὔποτ' αὖθις ὕ. S.Aj. 858

    ; ἔπειτα δ' ὕ., after μέν, Antiph.270;

    εἶτα.. ὕ. Id.53.4

    ; χρόνῳ ὕ. πολλῷ a long time after, Hdt.1.171; ὕ. χρόνῳ or χρόνῳ ὕ. some time later, Th.1.8,64;

    χρόνοις ὕ. Lys.3.39

    ;

    βραχεῖ χρόνῳ ὕ. X.Cyr.5.3.52

    ;

    οὐ πολλαῖς ἡμέραις ὕ. Id.HG1.1.1

    ; ὀλίγῳ or

    ὀλίγον ὕ. Pl.R. 327c

    , Grg. 471c;

    πολλῷ ὕ. Th.2.49

    , Pl.Phd. 58a;

    οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ ὕ.

     posterity,

    Id.R. 415d

    ; τὰ ὕ. γράμματα the later inscriptions, Id.Chrm. 165a.
    b c. gen.,

    ὕ. τούτων Hdt.1.113

    , etc.;

    ὕ. ἔτι τούτων Id.9.83

    ; τῆς ἐμεωυτοῦ γνώμης ὕ. after my own opinion was formed, Id.2.18; τοῦ δέοντος ὕ. later than ought to be, Ar.Lys.57: c. dat. et gen.,

    ἔτεσι πολλοῖσι ὕ. τούτων Hdt.6.140

    , cf. 1.91;

    πολλῷ ὕ. τῶν Τρωϊκῶν Th.1.3

    , cf. Isoc. 19.22: folld. by

    ἤ, τεσσαρακοστῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὕ... ἢ ποτείδαια ἀπέστη Th. 1.60

    , cf. 6.4.
    3 in Adv. sense with Preps.,

    ἐς ὕστερον Od.12.126

    , Hes.Op. 351, Hdt.5.41,74, S.Ant. 1194, E.IA 720, Pl.Ti. 82b, etc.:

    ἐν ὑστέρῳ Th.3.13

    , 8.27:

    ἐξ ὑστέρου D.S.14.109

    , D.H.4.73; also

    ἐξ ὑστέρης Hdt.1.108

    , 5.106, 6.85.
    B [full] ὕστᾰτος, η, ον, last:
    I of Place,

    ἅμα θ' οἱ πρῶτοί τε καὶ ὕστατοι Il.2.281

    ; εὐθυντὴρ ὕστατος νεώς hindmost, of a rudder, A. Supp. 717;

    ἡμῖν τοῖς ὑ. κατακειμενοις Pl.Smp. 177e

    .
    II of Time,

    τίνα πρῶτον, τίνα δ' ὕ. ἐξενάριξεν; Il.11.299

    , cf. 5.703, E HF485, etc.;

    ὁ δ' ὕ. γε.. πρεσβεύεται A.Ag. 1300

    ; ἡλίου.. πρὸς ὕ. φῶς ib. 1324; τὸν ὕ. μέλψασα γόον ib. 1445;

    τοὔπος ὕ. θροεῖ S.Aj. 864

    ; ἡ ὑστάτη (sc. ἡμέρα) τῆς ὁρτῆς the last day of.., Hdt.2.151;

    ἐν τοῖσιν ὑ. φράσω Ar. Ra. 908

    ; οὐκ ἐν ὑστάτοις not among the last, E. Ion 1115;

    οἱ ὕστατοι εἰπόντες D.1.16

    , etc.; ὕστατος ἁλώσιος ἀντάσαις meeting with his downfall at last, Pi.O.10(11).41.
    III of Rank or Degree,

    οὐκ ἐν ὑστάτοις S.Tr. 315

    ; τὰ ὕ. πάσχειν, like τὰ ἔσχατα, Luc.Phal.1.5.
    IV for regul. Adv. ὑστάτως (which occurs only in Hippiatr. 20), the neut. sg. and pl. are used,

    πύματόν τε καὶ ὕστατον Od.20.116

    ;

    ὕστατα καὶ πύματα 4.685

    , 20.13;

    νῦν ὕστατα Il.1.232

    , Od.22.78;

    ὕστατα ὁρμηθέντες Hdt.8.43

    ;

    καὶ πρῶτον καὶ ὕ. Pl.Mx. 247a

    ; ὕ. δή σε προσεροῦσι, τὸ ὕ. προσειπεῖν, Id.Phd. 60a, Luc.VH1.30.
    2 in Adv. sense with Preps.,

    ἐν ὑστάτοις

     at last,

    Pl.R. 620c

    ; εἰς τὸ ὕ. extremely,

    γέρων ἐς τὸ ὕ. Luc.Herm.9

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὕστερος

  • 18 κρίνω

    κρίνω (s. κρίμα; Hom.+) fut. κρινῶ; 1 aor. ἔκρινα; pf. κέκρικα; plpf. 3 sg. κεκρίκει (on the lack of augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; W-S. §12, 4; Mlt-H. 190; ἐκεκρίκει Just., D. 102, 2). Pass.: impf. ἐκρινόμην; 1 fut. κριθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐκρίθην; pf. κέκριμαι. Primary mng.: ‘to set apart so as to distinguish, separate’, then by transference
    ① to make a selection, select, prefer (Aeschyl., Suppl. 39 τὶ; Pla., Rep. 3, 399e κρίνειν τινὰ πρό τινος ‘prefer someone to someone’, cp. Phlb. 57e; Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 3 κ. τί τινι=select someth. because of someth. [a place because of its size]; κ. τὸ πρακτέον καὶ μὴ πρακτέον Did., Gen. 27, 3) ὸ̔ς μὲν γὰρ κρίνει ἡμέραν παρʼ ἡμέραν the one prefers one day to another Ro 14:5a. In the other half of the sentence ὸ̔ς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, κ. prob. has the sense recognize, approve (X., Hell. 1, 7, 34 ἔκριναν τὴν τῆς βουλῆς γνώμην) the other holds every day in esteem vs. 5b. Closely associated is mng.
    ② to pass judgment upon (and thereby seek to influence) the lives and actions of other people
    ⓐ judge, pass judgment upon, express an opinion about Mt 7:1a, 2a; Lk 6:37a; 1 Cl 13:2; Pol 2:3 (Sextus 183 ὁ κρίνων ἄνθρωπον κρίνεται ὑπὸ τ. θεοῦ). κ. δικαίως D 4:3; B 19:11. κ. κατʼ ὄψιν by the outward appearance J 7:24a. κατὰ τὴν σάρκα 8:15. τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κ. pass a right judgment 7:24b (on the expr. cp. Dt 16:18). This is perh. the place for 1 Pt 4:6 ἵνα κριθῶσιν κατὰ ἀνθρ. (s. ESelwyn, comm. ad loc. ref. to Lghtf.; cp. Wsd 3:4).
    ⓑ esp. pass an unfavorable judgment upon, criticize, find fault with, condemn (Epict. 2, 21, 11) Ro 2:1abc, 3; 14:3f, 10, 13a (a play on words, w. κρίνειν used in two different mngs. in the same vs.; s. 4 below on vs. 13b); Col 2:16; Js 4:11, 12; D 11:12. μή τι κρίνετε do not pronounce judgment on anything 1 Cor 4:5. ἱνατί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως; why is my freedom (of action) to be unfavorably judged by another person’s scruples? 1 Cor 10:29. μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτόν happy is the one who finds no fault w. himself Ro 14:22.—Also of a human judgment directed against God ὅπως ἂν νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε that you may win when you are judged Ro 3:4 (OMichel in KEK prefers active sense); 1 Cl 18:4 (both Ps 50:6).
    ③ to make a judgment based on taking various factors into account, judge, think, consider, look upon w. double acc. of the obj. and the predicate (Soph., Oed. R. 34; Pla., Rep. 9, 578b and s. Cebes 39, 4; 3 Macc 2:33; Just., D. 112, 1) οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτούς you do not consider yourselves worthy Ac 13:46 (Jos., Ant. 6, 159 ὸ̔ν αὐτὸς τ. βασιλείας ἄξιον ἔκρινεν; EpArist 98); cp. PtK 3 p. 15, 17. τὰ ὑστερήματα αὐτῶν ἴδια ἐκρίνετε you considered their shortcomings as your own 1 Cl 2:6. Pass. (Thu. 2, 40, 3; Jos., Ant. 4, 193) τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρʼ ὑμῖν; why do you think it is incredible? Ac 26:8 (Jos., Ant. 18, 76 ἄπιστα αὐτὰ κρίνειν).—Foll. by acc. w. inf. (Pla., Gorg., 452c, Rep. 9, 578b; X., An. 1, 9, 5; 28) κεκρίκατέ με πιστὴν … εἶναι Ac 16:15.—W. inf. foll. κρίνω μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς κτλ. 15:19.—Foll. by τοῦτο ὅτι 2 Cor 5:14.—W. direct quest. foll. ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε judge, decide for yourselves 1 Cor 11:13.—W. indirect quest. foll. (Thu. 4, 130, 7 κρίναντες ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, εἰ … ; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 5) εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν, ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ, κρίνατε decide whether it is right to obey you rather than God Ac 4:19.—κρίνατε ὑμεῖς ὅ φημι pass your own judgment on what I say 1 Cor 10:15.—ὀρθῶς ἔκρινας you have judged rightly Lk 7:43.
    ④ to come to a conclusion after a cognitive process, reach a decision, decide, propose, intend (Isocr. 4, 46; Polyb. 3, 6, 7; 5, 52, 6; 9, 13, 7; Epict. 2, 15, 7; Appian, Bell. Civ. 14, 118 §497 ὅταν οἱ θεοὶ κρίνωσιν; LXX) τί οὖν θέλετε, κρίνατε (restored) so decide now what you wish (to be done); w. inf. (Diod S 4, 33, 10; 17, 95, 1; UPZ 42, 37 [162 B.C.]; PTebt 55, 4 [II B.C.] ἔκρινα γράψαι; PLond III, 897, 11 p. 207 [84 A.D.]; 1 Macc 11:33; 3 Macc 1:6; Jdth 11:13; Wsd 8:9; Jos., Ant.7, 33; 12, 403; 13, 188; Did., Gen. 179, 7) Ac 3:13; 20:16; 25:25; 1 Cor 2:2; 5:3; Tit 3:12. W. τοῦ and inf. (B-D-F §397, 2) ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς Ac 27:1. ἐπεὶ ἤδη σεαυτῷ κέκρικας τοῦ μὴ δύνασθαι τὰς ἐντολὰς ταύτας ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπου φυλαχθῆναι since you have already decided in your own mind that these commandments cannot be kept by anyone Hm 12, 3, 6.—W. acc. and inf. (2 Macc 11:25, 36; 3 Macc 6:30; TestSol 10:8; SibOr 3, 127; Just., D. 102, 2) Ac 21:25 (even in the substantially different rdgs.). τοῦτο κέκρικεν …, τηρεῖν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον he has determined this, namely to keep his fiancée (pure and undefiled) 1 Cor 7:37 (s. s.v. γαμίζω 2; Diod S 4, 73, 2 of a father: κρίναι ταύτην [i.e. his daughter] παρθένον διαφυλάττειν). τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα but rather decide this, (namely) to give no offense Ro 14:13b. ἔκρινα ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο, τὸ … ἐλθεῖν 2 Cor 2:1. τὰ δόγματα τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τ. ἀποστόλων Ac 16:4 (cp. Polyb. 5, 52, 6 πράξας τὸ κριθέν; Epict. 2, 15, 7 τοῖς κριθεῖσιν ἐμμένειν δεῖ).
    ⑤ to engage in a judicial process, judge, decide, hale before a court, condemn, also hand over for judicial punishment, freq. as a legal t.t. (in a forensic sense Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    ⓐ of a human court
    α. act. and pass. abs. Ac 13:27. W. adv. GPt 3:7. κ. τινά: κατὰ τὸν νόμον J 18:31; Ac 23:3; 24:6 v.l. οὐδὲ ἐγὼ κρίνω ὑμᾶς GJs 16:3. Of the right of the apostle and the church to judge believers 1 Cor 5:12ab. μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον; does our law (personified) judge a person? J 7:51 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 50 §205 certain senators desire that before Mark Antony is declared a public enemy he should be brought to trial, ὡς οὐ πάτριον σφίσιν ἀκρίτου καταδικάζειν ‘on the ground that it was not their ancestral custom to condemn someone without a hearing’). ἐκ τ. στόματός σου κρινῶ σε I will punish you on the basis of your own statement Lk 19:22. Pass. Ac 25:10. κρίνεσθαι ἐπί τινι be on trial because of a thing 26:6 (Appian, Basil. 12 κρινόμενος ἐπὶ τῷδε=be brought to trial because of this thing; likew. Iber. 55 §233; Ath. 2, 3; of God ApcrEzk Fgm. d). Also περί τινος (Diod S 12, 30, 5) 23:6; 25:20; w. addition of ἐπί w. gen. of the court of judicature before someone (schol. on Hes., Op. 9) 24:21; 25:9; D 11:11.—τί δὲ καὶ ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον; Lk 12:57, which leads over into the sphere of jurisprudence (vs. 58), means: why cannot you yourselves decide what is right? (cp. the prayer for vengeance fr. Amorgos [BCH 25, 1901 p. 416; Dssm., LO 94=LAE 118] ἐπάκουσον, θεά, καὶ κρῖναι τὸ δίκαιον; cp. Appian, Mithrid. 89 §403 κρίνειν τὴν μάχην=decide the battle; Just., A II, 15, 5).
    β. mid. and pass.: ‘dispute, quarrel, debate’, also go to law (so Thu. 4, 122, 4 δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι; Hos 2:4 al. in LXX; TestSol 4:4ff D; Mel., P. 101, 773) τινί with someone (Job 9:3; 13:19) Mt 5:40; B 6:1 (Is 50:8); μετά τινος (Vi. Aesopi W 76 κριθῆναί με μετὰ τῆς κυρίας μου ἐπὶ σοί=I am pleading my case with my mistress before you; Eccl 6:10) 1 Cor 6:6. ἐπί τινος before someone (as judge) vs. 1 (on the beginning of 1 Cor 6 cp. the decree of Alexander to the Greeks in Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21: βούλομαι δὲ μὴ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς κρίνειν ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον, οὐδὲ ἐφʼ οὗ βούλεσθε=it is my wish [will] that you are not to go to law among yourselves, no matter what any of you may have against another, nor before anyone you wish).
    ⓑ of the divine tribunal
    α. occupied by God or Christ: abs. administer justice, judge J 5:30; 8:16, 50; cp. vs. 26; Rv 6:10; B 5:7. Pass. be judged Mt 7:1b, 2b; Lk 6:37b; Rv 11:18.—W. acc. foll. (PGM 4, 1013 of Horus ὁ κρίνων τὰ πάντα) J 5:22; 8:15b. τοὺς ἔξω 1 Cor 5:13. ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς judge the living and the dead 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; B 7:2. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων Ro 2:16. τὸν κόσμον B 4:12 (TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 10 [Stone p. 32]; ApcEsdr 3:3 p. 27, 8 Tdf.). τὴν οἰκουμένην Ac 17:31; AcPl Ha 9, 29. κ. κατὰ τὸ ἑκάστου ἔργον judge each one by what that person does 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Rv 20:13. ἐκρίθησαν οἱ νεκροὶ ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν the dead were judged by what was written in the books (of life and of death), in accordance w. their deeds vs. 12; δικαίως κ. judge uprightly (Sotades [280 B.C.] Fgm. 11, 2 Diehl2 II 6 p. 191 [in Stob. 4, 34, 8 vol. V p. 826, 5=Coll. Alex. p. 243] ὁ παντογενὴς … οὐ κρίνει δικαίως) 1 Pt 2:23; B 19:11. Also ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ Rv 19:11. διὰ νόμου κρίνεσθαι be judged on the basis of the law Js 2:12.—Oft. the emphasis is unmistakably laid upon that which follows the Divine Judge’s verdict, upon the condemnation or punishment: condemn, punish (opp. σῴζειν as TestJud 24:6; Mel., P. 104, 810; cp. ApcEsdr 1, 11 p. 25, 3 Tdf. ἐμὲ κρῖνον ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) J 3:17; cp. 18ab; 12:47ab, 48a; cp. 48b; Ac 7:7 (Gen 15:14); Dg 7:5f (opp. ἀγαπᾶν). διὰ νόμου κ. punish on the basis of the law Ro 2:12.—3:6f; 1 Cor 11:31f (here of the temporal punishment which God brings upon sinners); 2 Th 2:12; Hb 10:30 (κρινεῖ κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ the Lord will judge = punish his people is derived fr. Dt 32:36=Ps 134:14, where the judgment of God is spoken of, resulting in the vindication of the innocent [the thought prominent in the two OT pass.] and the punishment of the guilty [the thought prominent in the Hb pass.]); 13:4; Js 5:9; for 1 Pt 4:6 s. 2a above; Rv 18:8; 19:2; B 15:5.—W. the punishment given κ. διὰ πυρός 1 Cl 11:1; διὰ τῶν μαστίγων 17:5. κεκριμένοι ἤδη τῷ θανάτῳ already condemned to death B 10:5. Also εἰς θάνατον condemned to death Hs 9, 18, 2. οἱ κρινόμενοι ἀσεβεῖς the godless, who are condemned 2 Cl 18:1. Of the devil ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται J 16:11.—ταῦτα ἔκρινας you have imposed these punishments Rv 16:5.—On κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα 18:20 s. κρίμα 4.
    β. occupied by those who have been divinely commissioned to judge: the 12 apostles judge the 12 tribes Mt 19:28; Lk 22:30 (PBatiffol, RB n.s. 9, 1912, 541–43. But here κ. could have the broader sense rule; cp. 4 Km 15:5; Ps 2:10; 1 Macc 9:73; PsSol 17:29). κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία … σέ the one who is physically uncircumcised will sit in judgment upon you Ro 2:27. οἱ ἅγιοι as judges of the cosmos 1 Cor 6:2ab (κρίνεσθαι ἐν: Diod S 19, 51, 4.—On the saints as co-rulers with God cp. Epict., Ench. 15; Sallust. 21 p. 36, 14) as well as of the angels vs. 3 (cp. Da 7:22).
    ⑥ to ensure justice for someone, see to it that justice is done (LXX) τινί to someone 1 Cl 8:4 (Is 1:17).—B. 1428. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κρίνω

  • 19 πρεσβύτερος

    πρεσβύτερος, α, ον (Hom.+; comp. of πρέσβυς)
    ① pert. to being relatively advanced in age, older, old
    ⓐ of an individual person older of two ὁ υἱὸς ὁ πρ. (cp. Aelian, VH 9, 42; TestJob 15:2 τῷ ἀδελφῷ τῷ πρεσβυτέρῳ; JosAs; Just., A II, 6, 1) Lk 15:25; of Manasseh (w. Ephraim) B 13:5. In contrast to the younger generation οἱ πρεσβύτεροι the older ones J 8:9. Opp. οἱ νεανίσκοι Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1). Opp. νεώτεροι (s. νεός 3aβ) 1 Ti 5:1 (similar advice, containing a contrast betw. πρ. and νεώτ., from ins and lit. in MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.); 1 Pt 5:5 (though here the πρεσβύτεροι are not only the older people, but at the same time, the ‘elders’; s. 2bβ). The same double mng. is found for πρεσβύτεροι in 1 Cl 1:3 beside νέοι, while in 3:3; 21:6, beside the same word, the concept of being old is the dominant one (as Jos., C. Ap. 2, 206). On the disputed pass. Hv 3, 1, 8 (οἱ νεανίσκοι … οἱ πρεσβύτεροι) cp. MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.—Fem. πρεσβυτέρα old(er) woman (opp. νεωτέρα, as Gen 19:31) 1 Ti 5:2.—With no ref. to younger persons, w. complete disappearance of the comparative aspect: πρεσβύτερος an old man (Jos., Ant. 13, 226; 292 [as a witness of events in the past, as Ps.-Pla., Virt. 3, 377b; 4, 377c]) Hv 3, 12, 2; cp. 3, 11, 3. The personified church is called λίαν πρεσβυτέρα very old 3, 10, 3; cp. 3, 11, 2. She appears as ἡ πρ. the elderly woman 2, 1, 3; 3, 1, 2; 3, 10, 6; 9 and has τὰς τρίχας πρεσβυτέρας the hair of an old woman 3, 10, 4; 5; 3, 12, 1.
    ⓑ of a period of time (Petosiris, Fgm. 3 and 4 mention οἱ πρεσβύτεροι and οἱ νεώτεροι. In both instances the context shows that the reference is to astrologers from earlier and more recent times) οἱ πρεσβύτεροι the men of old, our ancestors Hb 11:2. ἡ παράδοσις τῶν πρεσβυτέρων the tradition of the ancients (cp. Iambl., Vi. Pyth. 35, 253 τῶν π. συγγράμματα) Mt 15:2; Mk 7:3, 5 (ELohse, D. Ordination im Spätjudentum u. NT, ’51, 50–56: scholars).
    ② an official (cp. Lat. senator), elder, presbyter
    ⓐ among the Jews (the congregation of a synagogue in Jerusalem used πρεσβύτεροι to denote its officers before 70 A.D.: SEG VIII, 170, 9; cp. Dssm., LO 378–80 [LAE 439–41]).
    α. for members of local councils in individual cities (cp. Josh 20:4; Ruth 4:2; 2 Esdr 10:14; Jdth 8:10; 10:6) Lk 7:3; 1 Cl 55:4.—Schürer II, 185.
    β. for members of a group in the Sanhedrin (Schürer II, 206–8; JJeremias, Jerusalem z. Zt. Jesu II B 1: Die gesellschaftl. Oberschicht 1929, 88ff). They are mentioned together w. (the) other groups: ἀρχιερεῖς (Ac 4:5 has ἄρχοντες for this), γραμματεῖς, πρεσβύτεροι (the order is not always the same) Mt 16:21; 26:3 v.l.; 27:41; Mk 8:31; 11:27; 14:43, 53; 15:1; Lk 9:22; 20:1.—Only ἀρχιερεῖς (Ac 4:8 has for this ἄρχοντες τοῦ λαοῦ) and πρεσβύτεροι (τοῦ λαοῦ: cp. Ex 19:7; Num 11:16b, 24; 1 Macc 7:33; 12:35; Just., D. 40, 4 al.) Mt 21:23; 26:3, 47, 59 v.l.; 27:1, 3, 12, 20; 28:(11), 12; Lk 22:52 (here, as an exception, οἱ στρατηγοὶ τοῦ ἱεροῦ); Ac 4:23; 23:14; 25:15; cp. 24:1. Also οἱ πρεσβύτεροι καὶ οἱ ἱερεῖς GPt 7:25 (for this combination cp. Jos., Ant. 11, 83; 12, 406).—Only πρεσβύτεροι and γραμματεῖς Mt 26:57; Ac 6:12.—The use of πρεσβύτερος as a title among the Jews of the Diaspora appears quite late, except for the allusions in the LXX (cp. Schürer III/1, 102; MAMA III [Cilicia], 344; 448 [cp. ZNW 31, ’32, 313f]. Whether πρεσβύτερος is to be understood in the older Roman inscriptions [CIJ 378] as a title [so CIJ p. lxxxvi], remains doubtful).
    ⓑ among the Christians (for their use of the word as a title one must bear in mind not only the Jewish custom, but also its use as a t.t. among the ἔθνη, in connection w. associations of the ‘old ones’ [FPoland, Geschichte des griech. Vereinswesens 1909, 98ff] and to designate civic as well as religious officials [Dssm., B 153ff=BS 154–57, NB 60ff=BS 233–35, also LO 315, 5; HHausschildt, ZNW 4, 1903, 235ff; MStrack, ibid. 213ff; HLietzmann, ZWT 55, 1914, 116–32 [=Kl. Schr. I ’58, 156–69]; MDibelius, exc. on 1 Ti 5:17ff; RAlastair-Campbell, The Elders, Seniority within Earliest Christianity ’94.].—BGU 16, 6 [159 A.D.] πρεσβύτεροι ἱερεῖς θεοῦ Σοκνοπαίου; 347, 6; PVindBosw 1, 31 [87 A.D.].—As honorary title: Iren. 4, 26, 5 [Harv. II 238, 3]. The Engl. word ‘priest’ comes fr. πρεσβύτερος via Lat. presbyter; later Christian usage is largely, if not entirely, responsible for this development; s. OED s.v. ‘priest’ B).
    α. Ac 11:30; 14:23; 15:2, 4, 6, 22f; 16:4 (in all the places in Ac 15 and 16 mention is made of οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι in the Jerusalem church); 20:17; 21:18; 1 Ti 5:17, 19 (Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 103a Jac. νεωτέρῳ πρεσβυτέρου καταμαρτυρεῖν οὐκ ἔξεστι); Tit 1:5; Js 5:14; 1 Pt 5:1, 5 (s. 1a above); 1 Cl 44:5; 47:6; 54:2; 57:1. WWrede, Untersuchungen zum 1 Cl 1891, 8ff.—Acc. to 2 Cl 17:3, 5 exhortation and preaching in the church services were among their duties.—In Ign. the πρεσβύτεροι come after the bishop, to whom they are subordinate IMg 2; 3:1; 6:1, or betw. the bishop and the deacons IPhld inscr.; 10:2; IPol 6:1, or the higher rank of the bishop in comparison to them is made plain in some other way ITr 3:1; 12:2 (s. πρεσβυτέριον b; cp. Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 22).—Polycarp—an ἐπίσκοπος, accord. to the title of the Ep. bearing his name—groups himself w. πρεσβύτεροι in Pol inscr., and further takes the presence of presbyters in Philippi for granted (beside deacons, though no ἐπίσκοπος is mentioned; cp. Hdb. on Pol inscr.) Pol 5:3.
    β. Just how we are to understand the words ὁ πρεσβύτερος, applied to himself by the author of the two smallest Johannine letters 2J 1; 3J 1, remains in doubt. But in any case it is meant to indicate a position of great dignity the elder.—HWindisch, exc. on 3J, end; ESchwartz, Über den Tod der Söhne Zebedaei 1904, 47; 51; HWendt, ZNW 23, 1924, 19; EKäsemann, ZTK 48, ’51, 292–311; DWatson, NTS 35, ’89, 104–30, rhetorical analysis of 2J.—ὁ πρ. and οἱ πρ. are mentioned by Papias in these much-discussed passages: 2:3, 4, 5, 7, 14, 15. For some of the lit. s. the note on JKleist’s transl. ’48, p. 207 n. 18.
    γ. In Rv there are 24 elders sitting on thrones about the throne of God; they form a heavenly council of elders (cp. Is 24:23) 4:4, 10; 5:5–14; 7:11, 13; 11:16; 14:3; 19:4. The elders have been understood as glorified human beings of some kind or astral deities (or angels) (for the var. views s. RCharles, ICC Rv I 128–33; JMichl, D. 24 Ältesten in d. Apk. d. hl. J. ’38); the number 24 has been referred to the following: the 24 priestly classes of the Jews (1 Ch 24:7–18; Jos., Ant. 7, 365–67) whose heads were called ‘elders’ (Yoma 1, 5; Tamid 1, 1; Middoth 1, 8); the 24 stars which, according to Babylonian belief, stood half on the north and half on the south of the zodiac (Diod S 2, 31, 4; POsl 4, 19: HGunkel, Z. religionsgesch. Verständnis des NT 1903, 42f; Boll 35f); the 24 hours of the day, represented as old men w. shining garments and w. crowns (acc. to the Test. of Adam [ed. CBezold, TNöldeke Festschr. 1906, 893–912]: JWellhausen, Analyse der Offb. Joh. 1907, p. 9, 1; NMorosof, Offb. Joh. 1912, 32); the 24 Yazatas in the state of the gods in heaven, acc. to Persian thought (Bousset). It is certainly an open question whether, or how far, the writer of Rv had any of these things in mind.—On the presbyters, and esp. on the question how ἐπίσκοπος and πρεσβύτερος were originally related to each other (a question which is raised particularly in the pastorals; cp. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. after 1 Ti 3:7 section 2 [w. lit.] and before 5:17), s. the lit. s.v. ἐπίσκοπος.—BEaston, Pastoral Epistles ’47, 188–97; WMichaelis, Das Ältestenamt ’53; GBornkamm, πρεσβύτερος; RCampbell, The Elders ’94.—B. 1472. DELG s.v. πρέσβυς. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πρεσβύτερος

  • 20 ἀπό

    ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.
    ① a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away from
    ⓐ w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.
    ⓑ w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.
    ⓒ verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.
    ⓓ w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.
    ⓔ in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.
    ⓕ as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.
    ② to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.
    ⓐ of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.
    ⓑ of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).
    α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.
    β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.
    γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.3-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.
    ⓒ the beg. of a series from … (on).
    α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).
    β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.
    ③ to indicate origin or source, from
    ⓐ lit., with verbs of motion
    α. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.
    β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.
    ⓑ lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.
    ⓒ fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.
    ⓓ fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.
    ⓔ γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).
    ④ to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).
    ⑤ to indicate cause, means, or outcome
    ⓐ gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).
    ⓑ to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).
    ⓒ to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).
    ⓓ to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer6-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).
    ⓔ to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, of
    α. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.
    β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.
    ⑥ In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.2 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀπό

Страницы
  • 1
  • 2

См. также в других словарях:

  • Any Day Now — «Any Day Now» Сингл Чака Джексона Выпущен …   Википедия

  • Any Day Now — may refer to:In film and television: * Any Day Now (TV series), an American drama series * Any Day Now (film) (Dutch: Vandaag of morgen ), a science fiction filmIn music: * Any Day Now (Joan Baez album) * Any Day Now (Legendary Pink Dots album) * …   Wikipedia

  • any day — In any circumstances • • • Main Entry: ↑any * * * informal at any time you can take me dancing any day of the week ■ (used to express one s strong preference for something) under any circumstances I d rather live in a shack in the woods than a… …   Useful english dictionary

  • Any Day Now (Scott Walker) — Album par Scott Walker Sortie 1973 Genre Pop Producteur John Franz Label Philips …   Wikipédia en Français

  • any day — ► any day informal 1) at any time. 2) under any circumstances. Main Entry: ↑day …   English terms dictionary

  • any day (now) — idiom (informal) very soon • The letter should arrive any day now. Main entry: ↑dayidiom …   Useful english dictionary

  • Any Day Now (TV series) — Infobox Television show name = Any Day Now caption = genre = creator = director = developer = presenter = starring = Annie Potts Lorraine Toussaint Mae Middleton Olivia Hack Sherri Dyon Perry Maya Goodwin voices = narrated = theme music composer …   Wikipedia

  • Any Day Now (1962 song) — Infobox Single Name = Any Day Now Artist = Ronnie Milsap from Album = Inside A side = B side = Released = April 1982 Format …   Wikipedia

  • Any Day Now (Joan Baez) — Pour les articles homonymes, voir Any Day Now. Any Day Now Album par Joan Baez Sortie décembre 1968 Durée 1:05:28 Genre …   Wikipédia en Français

  • Any Day Now (Joan Baez album) — Infobox Album Name = Any Day Now Type = Album Artist = Joan Baez Released = December 1968 Recorded = CBS Studios, Nashville, September 1968 Genre = Folk Length = 65:28 Label = Vanguard Producer = Maynard Solomon Reviews = *Allmusic Rating|4.5|5… …   Wikipedia

  • Any Day Now (Scott Walker album) — Infobox Album | Name = Any Day Now Type = Album Artist = Scott Walker Released = 1973 Recorded = Genre = Length = Label = Philips 6308 148 Producer = Reviews = * Allmusic Rating|2|5 [http://www.allmusic.com/cg/amg.dll?p=amg sql=10:3gq67ul0h0jk… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»